JP6734702B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can provide an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

Whether or not a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the game ball wins (passes) in a predetermined area provided on the game board. In addition to making the determination, the identification information is variably displayed, and if the determination result that the advantageous state is given is obtained, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the state is shifted to the advantageous state. There is. In the advantageous state, the variable winning device provided on the game board is opened several times after it is closed, and when the game ball is won in the variable winning device in the open state, a predetermined number of games are played. The ball is paid out.

In such a gaming machine, each time a game ball is won in a predetermined area, information indicating that the game ball has been won in a predetermined area is set with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (starting). It is possible to store (hold) a plurality of stored information), and based on the start stored information, the variation display and the stop display of the identification information are sequentially repeated to play the game. Further, when the startup memory information is stored, the determination result of whether or not to give the advantageous state before the variation display (the variation) of the identification information in the game corresponding to the stored startup memory information is started. Is stored. As a result, it is possible to give a big notice (a notice about an advantageous state) before the fluctuation starts.

In such a gaming machine, when the big hit game state is entered, if there is something that is determined to be put into the big hit game state in the held start memory information, it is executed during the big hit game state It has been proposed that the number of rounds to be performed is added to the number of rounds to be executed during the next big hit game state and displayed to notify the so-called "holding condominium" (see Patent Document 1). ).

JP, 2006-130192, A

However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, for example, when it is determined that the big hit game state in which the number of rounds to be executed is small is suspended and the above notification is given, the interest of the game is rather increased. There is a problem that the above notification may not be appropriately performed depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, for example.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify that a big hit gaming state is held in a continuous manner so as to improve interest. And

The present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which a game medium can roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
It has a specific area (for example, specific area 38A) that is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium is easily received and a second mode in which the game medium is hard to be received and through which the game medium can pass. A variable winning device (for example, a special winning opening 37),
Start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area,
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means (whether to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player) For example, with the main CPU 61),
Based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display) Part 53, the second special symbol display part 54),
Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display means has become a specific display mode,
As a gaming state in which the identification information can be variably displayed or stopped, a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which it is relatively easy to obtain a determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state rather than the normal gaming state (for example, (Probability variation game state), and variable game state control means capable of controlling to any game state including
Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the special game state after the specific game state ends, provided that the game medium has passed through the specific region in the specific game state.
A performance executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for performing a performance,
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the production execution means,
And a production mode control means for controlling a production mode for performing the production,
The specific game state control means can perform control such that passage of the game medium to the specific region is relatively easy at least during a specific period during the specific game state (for example, a specific second round game). And
The effect mode control means controls to any of the effect modes including a normal mode that can be set in the normal game state and a special mode that can be set in the normal game state or the special game state. Is possible,
The effect execution means,
In the specific game state, when the game medium passes through the specific area and the transition condition to the special game state is satisfied, it is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, a V winning time effect) indicating that effect. And
In the specific game state, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means includes the start storage information determined to be transferred to the specific game state by the specific game state transfer determination means. It is possible to perform suggestive production that suggests
The effect control means,
In the specific game state, when the game medium passes through the specific area and satisfies the transition condition to the special game state, the specific game is stored in the startup storage information stored in the startup storage information storage means. When the start memory information determined to be shifted to the specific game state by the state transition determination means is included, the first effect (for example, V winning time effect based on special V winning time effect data) is effected. When the starting memory information that is executed by the executing means and is determined to be transferred to the specific game state by the specific game state transfer determining means is not included, the second effect different from the first effect ( For example, the above-mentioned performance executing means is caused to execute a V-winning performance based on normal V-winning performance data,
The second effect is configured to include the specific effect,
The first effect is configured to include the specific effect and further include the suggestive effect,
The first effect and the second effect can be executed in the specific game state that has moved when the special mode has been set, while the specific effect that has transitioned when the normal mode has been set It is a game machine characterized by an effect that is not executed in a game state.

In the present invention, in a specific game state (eg, big hit game state), a game medium passes (V prize) through a specific area (eg, specific area 38A), and a transition condition to a special game state (eg, probability variation game state) When satisfying the condition, a specific effect (for example, a V-winning effect) is performed, but in this case, the held starting memory information includes the starting memory information that is determined to shift to the specific game state. In this case, an effect different from that in the case where there is no starting memory information for determining the transition to the specific game state is configured. That is, when the game state after the V prize is won and the specific game state is finished is determined, the fact that the game is held in suspension (or the possibility thereof) is notified together with that effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the specific game state is in a suspended state so as to improve the interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying that a big hit game state is held in a suspended state so as to improve interest.

It is an external perspective view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially expanded perspective view of the game board in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the transition figure which shows the game state and the production mode of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening/closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening/closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch pending change pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch pending change pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation reservation change pattern decision table of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation reservation change pattern decision table of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation interlocking production scenario determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation interlocking production|generation stage transition determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the contents of production for every operation interlocking production scenario of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the contents of production for every operation interlocking production scenario of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario determination table in RUSH mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a timer update process of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design related switch check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the 1st special winning a prize oral switch check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special winning a prize mouth switch check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design control processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design memory check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design decision processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation time management processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design display time management processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit start interval management processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special winning opening of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design game ending processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the command reception interruption processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows push-down operation button operation judging processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows push-down operation button operation judging processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern decision processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing in RUSH mode of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the item production processing during RUSH mode of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the processing in the normal mode of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the reservation display mode change production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of a hit start of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of V winnings of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the operation interlocking production of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the operation interlocking production of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the operation interlocking production of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the takeover selection operation screen of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the music selection operation screen of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display in RUSH mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the item used by the item production in RUSH mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing a screen display example of the item effect in the RUSH mode of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the hold display mode change production of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the V winning a prize effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view showing a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening/closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design control processing of the game machine which relates to the other execution form of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Structure of game machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. 1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a body frame base on which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which game balls can roll down is detachably provided. A main frame 2 having a plate 2a (also referred to as a main frame base), and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h through which the game board 1 can be visually recognized (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) A front frame 3 that is rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (on the player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). A rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably provided, and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main frame 2 at the rear side (opposite player side) of the main frame 2. I have it.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the outer frame 6. The body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6, and in this state, the rear frame is , It is housed in the outer frame 6 and thus not shown.

The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame constituent members provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decoration member 15, left decoration member 16) and the like. It should be noted that the front frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members forming the front frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, respective cover members (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

In the front frame 3, a transparent protective glass 7 is provided in the front frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. It is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side with the front frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 2. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both sides above the front frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 having a patrol accessory described later therein is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decoration member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decoration member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a) are provided.

Inside the right decoration member 15 and the left decoration member 16, a light emitting means (for example, a lamp/LED 27 etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). .. The light emitted from the lamp/LED 27 is transmitted through the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16, and is sensed by the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 as radiant light, diffused light, or the like having an excellent appearance. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, a dish unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 is provided with an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 is provided with a lower plate body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper part of the lower plate body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 is an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the outer frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, The upper plate 17 is provided with an upper plate decoration member for improving the aesthetics of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with the upper plate left decoration 17a, the upper plate front decoration 17c, etc. so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape that is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side and toward the lower plate 18 midway toward the right side.

In the front frame base plate 3a, a payout opening 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ), and a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage of a game ball that is paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), and a ball passage cover that configures a ball passage by connecting the discharge port and the supply port 21 (illustrated) Is omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout opening 20, while the game ball is paid out, but the more the game ball stays near the payout opening 20, the upper plate 17 Is full, or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged from the outlet through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. Sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, a plated member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plated member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front part of the upper plate 17. The use of the plated member 17b enhances the decorative effect of the exterior design of the gaming machine, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

On the upper plate upper cover 8a, a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player's operation (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the press operation button 9A is projected in the vertical direction from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer periphery of the press operation button 9A is shown. The operation unit 9 is configured so that the jog dial 9B is arranged therein.

Regarding the front frame 3, a portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side, for example, an illegal wire such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which an unauthorized member conducts an illegal act with respect to various structures constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the member by intruding the member.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraud, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member intrudes. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function, which has three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention. Therefore, it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. Is eliminated, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The body frame components include the launching device 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members forming the main body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for placing the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the front surface of the body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b provided on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of, and is configured to include a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

A cutout 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. The launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

The firing handle 26b is provided with a support portion (not shown), a handle gup 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion, and is rotatable in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and is provided in the support portion. A firing stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the sphere, a firing stop button 26e (also referred to as an operating member) for ON/OFF operating the firing stop switch, and a handle grip 26d are arranged so as to cover the opening. And a handle cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased/decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time causes the driving force to be stored in the upper plate 17. The game ball being played is launched toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the firing drive device is stopped and controlled, whereby the firing of the game ball can be stopped.

In this embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout/firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launching device 26, there is provided a spring member (not shown) for constantly elastically biasing the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction. By rotating the handle grip 26d clockwise, the game ball is fired.

When the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting point position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the projection of the handle grip 26d (not shown) pushes the firing stop button 26e, so that the firing of the game ball is stopped.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (illustration is shown). It is known that the emission intensity of the game ball is increased/decreased by changing the power supplied to (not shown). However, in the firing device 26 of the present embodiment, the turning operation of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b. A firing spring (not shown), which is not shown, and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b to strengthen or weaken the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring, thereby causing a game ball. The firing intensity of is increased or decreased.

The speaker 10c is provided at the center of the lower portion of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). Has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7 and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which a shot game ball can roll down. doing. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting opening 33, a passage gate 35, First big winning opening 36, second big winning opening 37, first big winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing first big winning opening 36, second big winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing second big winning opening 37, second Specific area 38A and non-specific area 38B located below the special winning opening 37, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, an outlet 41, an upper movable effect member 42A, a lower movable effect. The member 42B, the cover member 43, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED unit 5 are provided. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, the passage gate 35, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40. The winning area is formed by. Note that FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

The guide rail 30 includes an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game balls to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The stage 31 distributes the flow areas of the game balls in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball shot by the launching device 26 flows downward toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to collision with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1 or a stage 31. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40, and If the player does not win the prize, or if the player does not win the prize after passing through the passage gate 35, the prize is discharged from the outlet 41 to be collected.

In addition, the winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, so that a situation advantageous to the player (for example, opening of a second starting opening 33 described later, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.) is given. Means to do. At this time, passing the winning area with the game ball means mere passing, and entering the winning area with the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the outlet 41, but in any case, it will be described later. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering are substantially synonymous. Therefore, since both the game ball passing through the winning area and the winning ball lead to winning, in the present embodiment, the expression "winning" will be used unless otherwise specified. Further, passing of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so the game ball mainly flows down on the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally large, so the game ball mainly flows down on the right side of the stage 31. In general, the way of hitting the game ball to the left side of the stage 31 is called “left hit”, and the way of hitting the game ball to the right side of the stage 31 is called “right hit”.

The first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that a game ball wins, and an opportunity for displaying the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. To give. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 realize a first starting area and a second starting area.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When the game balls are won in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided immediately below the first starting port 32. When a game ball is won in the second starting opening 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. Winning difficulty of the second starting opening 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 33 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 is opened/closed so as to have a forward tilted/retracted attitude in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows or facilitates winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 33, It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball into the second starting opening 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 to open and close in the front-rear direction, and for example, a so-called electric tulip type in which the starting opening is widened by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. It may be a thing or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting opening by moving horizontally in the front-back direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 gives an opportunity to open the second starting opening 33. The winning of the game ball to the passage gate 35 is detected by the passage gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passage gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are opened in the winning game state (big hitting game state), which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The first special winning opening 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the passage gate 35. The second special winning opening 37 is provided on the substantially right side of the second starting opening 33 and directly below the first special winning opening 36. The positions at which the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are arranged are not limited to the above-mentioned positions, but can be changed appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.

The first big winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large lateral dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. A first special winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first special winning opening 36 is provided in the vicinity of the first special winning opening 36. The winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 36 is detected by the first special winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

The second big winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that the game balls can be won one by one. A second special winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second special winning opening 37 is provided near the second special winning opening 37. The winning of the game ball into the second special winning opening 37 is detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

The first special winning opening shutter 36A switches the first special winning opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by performing an opening/closing operation so as to have a forward tilted/retracted posture in the front-back direction of the game board 1. It is arranged to cover the first special winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 36A is changed to an open state in which the game balls can be won into the first special winning opening 36, which is easy or easy, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

The second special winning opening shutter 37A switches the second special winning opening 37 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-back direction of the game board 1. In the closed state, the second special winning opening 37 is opened. It is arranged to cover. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 37A is changed to an open state in which the game balls can be won or easily opened in the second special winning opening 37, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

The specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are areas through which the game balls won in the second special winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered by the cover member 43. The ball passage of the game ball from the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has won the second big winning opening 37 passes through either one of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B, and then is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected. A second special winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at an intermediate position of the ball passage from the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. The non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A is provided near the specific area 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 changes to an open state (first state) in which a V prize of a game ball can be easily or easily entered into the specific area 38A and a closed state (second state) in which a V prize cannot be or is difficult. Is driven by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which the V winning has become impossible passes through the non-specific area 38B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special winning opening 36, the first big winning opening shutter 36A, the first big winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first big winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning device. Has been realized. The second special winning opening 37, the second special winning opening shutter 37A, the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second special winning opening count switch 370 realize a second variable winning device.

One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, as a normal gaming state controlled by a main control circuit 60 described later, a non-probable variation/non-time saving gaming state, and a special symbol lottery winning probability is non-probable variation/ Probability variation game state that is higher than the non-time saving game state (special game state), and winning probability of ordinary symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability variation or non-time saving game state. That is, there is a normal game state which is a time saving game state), and when the special symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, the big hit game state (specific game state) is entered.

In the time saving game state, since the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery becomes a high probability state, it becomes easy to win the prize in the second starting opening 33 by the support of the blade member 34 as the ordinary electric throwing object. This state is a so-called "electric sapo", and it becomes easy to accumulate reserved balls for a special symbol game described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game balls by winning the second starting opening 33. Specifically, the time saving game state is a state where the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is relatively high (time saving game state 1), a state where the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time saving game state 2). ), which means at least one of the states (time saving game state 3) in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long. For example, the time saving game state includes a state in which the time saving game state 1, the time saving game state 2, and the time saving game state 3 simultaneously proceed in any combination. In such a time saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

After the jackpot gaming state in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is successful in the jackpot gaming state, it is surely shifted to the probability variation gaming state and not shifted to the non-probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit game state ends with non-V win without succeeding in the V win to the specific area 38A, after the end of the big hit game state, the non-probability variation game state is set. Further, in the probability variation game state, the special symbol lottery 20 times (variable display and stop display of the special symbol 20 times) has been performed, so that the transition to the non-probability variation game state is made. The certainty variation game state which ends by performing such a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is also referred to as ST (Special Time) game state. It should be noted that after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability variation gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the specific jackpot gaming state, it always shifts to the time saving game state, and does not shift to the non-time saving game state. On the other hand, after the end of the big hit game state that is not a specific big hit game state, it is adapted to shift to the non-time saving game state. In addition, the special symbol lottery 100 times (variable display and stop display of the special symbol 100 times) in the time saving game state is triggered to shift to the non-time saving game state. In addition, you may make it maintain a time saving game state until it transfers to the next big hit game state after the end of a specific big hit game state.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear to be in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. It is located in. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when performing a specific effect, and performs a rotating operation and a light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the second special winning opening 37, and is attached below the first special winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms the second special winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located at the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37. In addition, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second special winning opening 37 is provided at the front edge of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B through the second special winning opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is arranged so as to cover the second special winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, a normal symbol display section 51, a normal symbol hold display section 52, a first special symbol display section 53, It has a 2 special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not particularly shown, the lamp/LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes a lamp corresponding to a character appearance notification lamp, and a transition to the big hit game state is confirmed. It lights up (or blinks) when a special character changes in the game state or when a special character (hereinafter also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the big hit game state. It is like this.

The normal symbol display portion 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting opening 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric auditory product when the game ball wins the passage gate 35. The result of the lottery for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display portion 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and lit in blue, for example, and lights up in red in the case of winning in the normal symbol game, and lights up in blue in the case of losing in the normal symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display portion 51 is turned on, for example, in a red lighting state, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 33. It should be noted that the lighting pattern corresponding to the winning and the loss of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode, for example, in the case of winning, it becomes a lighting state or a blinking state, while in the case of losing it becomes a non-lighting state. You may

Ordinary symbol reservation display unit 52, by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, a new game ball wins the passage gate 35 while the ordinary symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display. When it does, it displays the number of executable times of the variable display of the normal symbol that has been held in order to perform the variable display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 are normally located on the left side of the symbol display portion 51, and are arranged side by side in a row with the LED lamp 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the hold number is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522 and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are turned on.

The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 show the result of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) that is identification information triggered by winning a game ball to the first starting opening 32, and first. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting opening 32 is displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special symbol") that is identification information triggered by winning the game ball to the second starting opening 33, and secondly. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting opening 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 realize identification information display means.

The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED or the like, and each segment is individually turned on and off repeatedly. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (design) formed by turning on/off each segment of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the second special symbol are in different modes. As the winning symbol of the first special symbol, there is a symbol that triggers the transition to the big hit gaming state, and it is possible to shift to the probability change/time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. (Short-time hit) big hit pattern, and the big hit pattern of "big hit 5" and "big hit 6" (time saving per hit) that can shift to the probability variation/non-time saving game state after the big hit game state ends, and as a rule after the big hit game state ends There is a "big hit 7" (normal hit) big hit symbol that shifts to a non-probable variation/non-time saving game state (see FIG. 8). As the winning symbol of the second special symbol, a symbol that triggers the transition to the big hit gaming state, which can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, "big hit 6" to "big hit 9" ) There is a jackpot pattern (see Figure 8). The first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of turning on/off two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and by turning on or off these LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, the first special symbol display unit 53. Or, for the variable display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first starting opening 32 during the variable display of the symbols for the special symbol game by the second special symbol display unit 54. The feasible frequency (reserved number) of the variable display of the first special symbol display section 53 that is suspended is displayed. The second special symbol reservation display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, the first special symbol display unit 53. Or, the second special symbol display unit 54 is held for the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game after the next when the new game ball is won in the second starting opening 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game. The feasible number (holding number) of the variable display of the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 are arranged side by side vertically, and are located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of reservations on the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of reservations on the normal symbol reservation display unit 52.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, to the first starting opening 32. The game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting port 33. When it is done, execution (start) of variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended. When the symbols that have been variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 that has been suspended The variable display of symbols is started.

Here, the upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the The number of variable displays to be held on the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the 2 starting opening 33 is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display portion 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display portion 53 is the main RAM 63 (Fig. 6) is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) as starting memory (starting memory information), and the information of the first special symbol game for four times held is the first special symbol starting memory area ( 1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) are stored as starting memory. Similarly, for the second special symbol game, when four times are held, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63 ( 0) is stored as starting memory (starting memory information), and the information of the second special symbol game for four times held is the second special symbol starting memory region (1) to the second special symbol starting memory region (4 ) Is stored as a start memory. Therefore, the number of winning prizes to both the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, that is, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, is a maximum of eight in total.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 It is also possible to display the suspension of winning in the first starting opening 32 and the suspension of winning in the second starting opening 33.

The round display portion 59 is lit up while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the jackpot gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 12 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “12R”), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when setting a big hit game state of a number of rounds different from the above number of rounds, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is turned on, and the other LED lamps are turned off. You can The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may be an ordinal number indicating the order in which round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, it is described as "12 rounds" or "12R", and when the latter is meant, it is described as "12Rth". In the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged at the rear of the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting mouth 33, various images related to the game, for example, identification symbols for effects, effect images in the normal game state, effects during the big hit game state Images, effect images for demonstration display, etc. are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to perform variable display of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes an effect display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp/LED 27 constitute an effect execution means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect executing means are also used as informing means.

[Electrical structure of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling the game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable/writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I/O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmitting unit, and a backup capacitor 67. Equipped with. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the main CPU 61 realizes an advantageous state determination means (specific game state transition determination means), a specific game state control means, a special game state control means, and a round game execution means.

To the main control circuit 60, a first starting port switch 320 arranged behind the first starting port 32 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320, the main CPU 61 performs a winning lottery. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to give the advantageous state.

To the main control circuit 60, a second starting port switch 330 arranged behind the second starting port 33 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, the main CPU 61 performs a winning lottery. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to give the advantageous state.

The first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330 are determined to have won a game ball when detecting that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, and a predetermined detection signal is given. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

To the main control circuit 60, a pass gate switch 350 arranged behind the pass gate 35 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display portion 51. In addition, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51, an effect image that makes the player understand that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do it.

The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that the game ball has won when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 35. As a result, the passage gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second starting opening 33.

To the main control circuit 60, a general winning opening left switch 400A and a general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning openings 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 are connected. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

To the main control circuit 60, a first special winning opening counter switch 360 arranged behind the first special winning opening 36 is connected. The first special winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the first special winning opening 36. When the winning of the game balls is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 360, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as prize balls through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21 or the upper plate 17 or the lower plate. The dish 18 is paid out.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second special winning opening count switch 370 arranged behind the second special winning opening 37. The second special winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the second special winning opening 37. When the winning of the game balls is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of the game balls as the prize balls through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21 to the upper plate 17 Alternatively, the lower plate 18 is paid out.

The first special winning opening count switch 360 and the second special winning opening count switch 370 mainly control a predetermined detection signal when the game ball passes through the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. Supply to the circuit 60.

A specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 on the assumption that a V prize has been given when it has detected that the game ball has passed the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed the non-specific area 38B in the big hit game state.

The main control circuit 60 includes a first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A that drives the first special winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first special winning opening 36, and a second special winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second special winning opening 37. Exclusively controls the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A that drives 37A. As a result, the first special winning opening shutter 36A is changed into an open state in which the winning of the game ball into the first winning opening 36 is possible or easy, and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. In a situation in which the first special winning opening 36 is at least closed, the second special winning opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which a game ball can be won into the second special winning opening 37 or easily opened. The game balls are driven so as to change to a closed state where winning is impossible or difficult. The opening drive of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 by the first big winning opening shutter 36A and the second big winning opening shutter 37A is the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display. The special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the section 54, and is performed when the big hit game state is entered.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined light emitting mode on the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the gaming state that is not the time saving game state (that is, "at the time of low probability") is 1/65536 (see FIG. 8), and in most cases the blade member 34 is never opened. On the other hand, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the time-saving game state (that is, “at a high probability”) is 65534/65536 (see FIG. 8), and in most cases, the blade member 34 is opened for 1.3 seconds three times. In addition, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state that is not the time saving gaming state (that is, "at the time of low probability") may be 0 (that is, non-winning is determined without being drawn). In addition, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the time saving game state (that is, “high probability time”) may be 1 (that is, the winning is determined without being drawn).

The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. As a result, when the round game to be described later is being executed in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and it is possible or easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A. Become. On the other hand, if the displacement member 39 is closed even in the big hit game state, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55, when the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the first based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32. Execution (start) of variable display of special symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of holdings related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol reservation display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, 1st special symbol display section 53 or 2nd special symbol display section 54 until the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol which is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 33 Execution (start) of variable display of special symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of holdings related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the winning order.

In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of pending executions of variable display of special symbols, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 sets the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33. The maximum number of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, respectively, is four at maximum. (I.e., 4 detection times) are stored, and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as a reserved number. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the number of holdings is again increased up to four.

When the holding number of the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held up to, for example, four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 1 special symbol starting memory area (0) is remembered as starting memory, after that, the information of the special symbol game where the number of reservations is 4 is in 1st special symbol starting memory areas (1)-(4) of main RAM63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, if the number of holding the second special symbol game is held up to, for example, four, the second corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as a start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for which the number of holdings is 4 is the first of the main RAM 63. 2 Special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

Therefore, the total number of game balls to be reserved for the special symbol game associated with winning the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is 4, respectively.

In the opened state of the first special winning opening 36 by the first special winning opening shutter 36A, the count value by the first special winning opening count switch 360 (the number of winning game balls) becomes a predetermined number (eg, eight winning numbers). It is maintained until either one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined opening time, which will be described later, has elapsed. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first special winning opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first special winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first special winning opening 36. To be done.

Similarly, in the opened state of the second special winning opening 37 by the second special winning opening shutter 37A, the count value by the second special winning opening count switch 370 (the number of winning game balls) is a predetermined number (eg, eight winning numbers). Or a predetermined opening time, which will be described later, elapses, until either one of the conditions is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second special winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second special winning opening 37. To be done.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called "round game (round game)". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game, the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 is opened as the next round game. The states up to are also referred to as “game between rounds”, “interval between rounds”, or simply “interval”. In one round game, each of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 may be opened and closed several times. Further, in one round game, the open/closed state of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one special winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other special winning opening is continuously closed.

The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is not provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from the big hit game state, but a small hit game state may be provided. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and is defined, for example, such that the second big winning opening 37 is opened only once. However, when the small hit game state is provided, the arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened for a plurality of times. Further, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting gaming state may be changed to a gaming state different from the gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming state, and the gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming state. It is also possible to return to.

The round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as the first round, and the second round game may be referred to as the second round. In the following description (including the drawings referred to along with the description), a “round” with a number such as 1 round or 1st round is simply “R” such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 12R, etc. ] In a round game, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times. When it reaches, the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are closed, and the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are not opened for the remaining number of times of opening. , The round game is ended.

Further, in the specific round game in which the second special winning opening 37 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A becomes the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the jackpot gaming state. That is, in a specific round game, a game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win a V prize. On the other hand, in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball is temporarily won in the second special winning opening 37. Even if it does, the game ball becomes impossible or difficult to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) include jackpot gaming state (first specific gaming state) that includes a specific round game, and jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) that does not include a specific round game. There is.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers, except in a specific case. Designs (decorative designs), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2"... "7" are variably displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbols that have been variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, if the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, let the player understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in one of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" that many exits can obtain. When the display is stopped, the combination of the decorative symbols for presentation displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 has a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are arranged in each of a plurality of symbol columns). The display image for big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 enters a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first start area (first start opening 32). It functions as a first specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, on condition that the game medium has passed through the second start area (second start port 33). It functions as a second specific game state transition determination means.

Further, the main CPU 61 controls the game state to the specific game state on the condition that the determination result indicating that the first or second specific game state transition determination unit obtains the transition to the specific game state is obtained. Function as.

Further, the main CPU 61, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state, after the specific game state is finished, the determination result that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state Functions as special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (probability variation game state) that is relatively easy to obtain.

Further, the main CPU 61, in the specific game state, a first round game (round) in which the first variable winning device (first big winning opening shutter 36A) is changed to a first mode (open state) and a second mode (closed state). It functions as a first round game executing means for executing a game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the first round game executing means, can control the first variable winning device to change between the first mode and the second mode while executing the first round game at least once.

Further, the main CPU 61, in the specific game state, a second round game (round) in which the second variable winning device (second big winning opening shutter 37A) is changed to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state). It functions as a second round game executing means for executing a game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as a second round game executing means is a specific round game mode in which it is relatively easy for a game medium to pass through the second variable winning device to the specific region 38A during execution of at least one second round game. It is possible to play a specific second round game in which the control for changing the first mode and the second mode is performed. In addition, during execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in a predetermined round game mode in which passage of the game medium to the specific area 38A is relatively difficult. It is also possible to control.

In addition, the jackpot game state is a first specification in which the first round game execution means executes a specific number of first round games, and at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. It includes a game state and a second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution unit while the first round game is executed a specific number of times by the first round game execution unit.

A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described below, including various functions of the main CPU 61, and various tables.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable/writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I/O port 65 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and outputs output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 sends various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when the power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal board 80. ..

The external terminal board 80 is connected to an unillustrated calling device having a function of calling a hall attendant or a function of displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication.

The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first starting opening switch 320, a second starting opening switch 330, a passage gate switch 350, a first big winning opening count switch 360, and a second big winning opening count switch 370. The specific area switch 380A, the non-specific area switch 380B, the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, and the backup clear switch 81 are included.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout/launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, when the power is cut off or the like according to the operation of the hall manager.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84 via the dispensing/launching control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout/launch control circuit 82. The payout/launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launching device 26 and the dispensing device 83, and is connected to the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout/launching control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 implement a game value giving means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting to lend a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can send and receive a signal to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout/launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Thereby, the payout device 83 is caused to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32, and three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the second starting opening 33. 4 or 3 as the number of prize balls per winning in the general winning opening 40 (for example, 4 in the case of winning in the general winning opening 40 located on the left side of the game board 1; In the case of winning a prize in the general winning opening 40 located on the right side, 3 gaming balls are paid out, and 14 games as the number of winning balls per winning in the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37. Give out the ball.

The payout/firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the firing handle 26b of the firing device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. The electric power is supplied to and the game ball is controlled to be fired toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed with an interrupt condition generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) as a trigger.

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that a command is supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. The lamp/LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, the sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down operation button switch 90A provided on the push-down operation button 9A and is also connected to a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push-down operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-down operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a push-down operation signal from the push-down operation button switch 90A and a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B. The push-down operation button 9A and the jog dial 9B function as operation means capable of accepting an operation related to the player's effect.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as effect display means, and the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c function as music output means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes an effect control unit that controls each function related to such an effect. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 implement storage means.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a symbol fluctuation display means in a symbol fluctuation display area 700 described later, and functions as a reserved information display means in a first reserved ball display area 701 and a second reserved ball display area 702 described later, It functions as the variation information display means in the variation holding sphere display area 703 described later. In addition, it functions as a first information display unit that displays first information (holding ball described later) in a first holding ball display area 701, a second holding ball display area 702, and a variable holding ball display area 703 that will be described later. To do. In addition, the item display area 800 functions as a second information display unit that displays second information (an item described later).

Further, the sub CPU 71 functions as a pre-reading expectation notification production means for controlling a pre-reading pending change effect described later, and functions as a variation expectation notification notification producing means for controlling the fluctuation holding change presentation described later, Functioning as the first display mode determining means for determining the display mode of the information (holding ball) and functioning as the second display mode determining means for determining the display mode of the second information (item).

A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores programs and tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and for example, an image data processor (VDP) and for generating various image data. The image data ROM stores data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing the image data, and a D/A converter for converting the image data as an image signal. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D/A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling the sound (voice, music, etc.) to be output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c. For example, a sound source IC for controlling the sound and sound data for storing various sound data. It includes a ROM and an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying a sound signal. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the configuration is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the sounds to be output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and one of the plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Sound data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. The amplifier amplifies the sound signal and outputs the sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp/LED 27 including a decoration lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which plural kinds of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It consists of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by, for example, operating the push-down operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9 in the big hit game state. And the like) are controlled.

[Game state and production mode of gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a gaming state and an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The game state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as a gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, a non-probable/non-shortened time gaming state (normal gaming state), a probable/non-shortened gaming state, a non-probable/shortened gaming state, and a probable/shortened gaming state. The state is implemented, and in FIG. 7, the non-probability variation/non-time saving game state is shown as "non-probability variation & non-time saving", the probability variation/non-time saving game state is shown as "probability variation 20 times", non-probability variation/time saving game state. Is shown as "100 time reductions" and the probability variation/time reduction game state is shown as "20 probability reductions & 100 time reductions". Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a special mode, and a RUSH mode as effect modes for gaming states other than the big hit gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as a big hit game state, it is a big hit game state due to the first special symbol hit, probability variation short time 12R, probability variation short time 8R-1, probability variation time short 8R-2, probability variation time short hit 4R, 4R-1 per probability variation, 4R-2 per probability variation, and 8R per normal, which is a big hit game state due to per second special symbol, 12R-1 per hour, medium hour per hour 12R-2, 8R per hour per hour, And, 4R per hour/time reduction is installed (refer to FIG. 8). In FIG. 7, 12R per probability variation short time, 8R-1 per probability variation time short, 8R-2 per probability variation time short, and 4R per probability variation time short. 4R-1 per probability variation and 4R-2 per probability variation are shown as "medium during probability variation", 8R per normal are shown as "normal medium", 12R-1 per hour, medium and short, 12R-2 per hour, 8R per hour and medium speed and 4R per hour and medium time are indicated as "medium during medium and short time". Although not shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of effect modes are installed as effect modes in the big hit game state.

The normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to an uncertain variation/non-time saving game state, and is a special mode, a RUSH mode, or an effect mode in which the player stays when neither hit. For example, in the special mode, when 20 special symbol games are exhausted, the special mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, in the RUSH mode, when 100 special symbol games are exhausted, the RUSH mode is shifted to the normal mode. Also, during the probability variation hit transition from the normal mode, when the non-V winning and the big hit game state ends, the probability variation hit transition to the normal mode. In addition, during the normal winning transition from the normal mode, when the non-V winning and the big hit game state is finished, the normal winning shifts to the normal mode.

Further, in the normal mode, based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, it is a big hit game state due to the first special symbol, and the probability variation is shortened. It shifts to hitting, probability changing hitting, or normal hitting. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the normal mode, based on the starting memory information of the second special symbol described above, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, It is a big hit game state due to 2 special symbol hits, and sometimes it shifts to short-time middle hit.

Further, as a specific display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, any combination mode of "1" to "7" is stopped and displayed, but when the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed. In, it is determined that it is a big hit symbol corresponding to the "big hit 1" (hit pattern 1) of the first special symbol. Also, when it is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "1", "3" or "5", a big hit corresponding to "big hit 2" to "big hit 4" (hit patterns 2 to 4) of the first special symbol. There is a high possibility that it is a symbol (that is, the degree of expectation of shifting to RUSH mode is high), and it is possible that it is a jackpot symbol corresponding to "big jackpot 5" to "big jackpot 7" (hit patterns 4-7) of the first special symbol. Property is low (that is, the degree of expectation of shifting to RUSH mode is low). In addition, when it is stopped and displayed as another combination mode, there is a high possibility that it is a big hit symbol corresponding to the "big hit 5" to "big hit 7" (hit patterns 4 to 7) of the first special symbol (that is, The degree of expectation to shift to RUSH mode is low), it is unlikely that it is a big hit pattern corresponding to the first special symbol "big hit 2" to "big hit 4" (hit patterns 2 to 4) (that is, shift to RUSH mode). Expectations are low). However, if a specific character design other than numbers is further provided as a decorative design, and is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of this specific character design, it is possible that any of the first special designs may be a big hit design. May be. In addition, as described above, in the normal mode, it is a big hit game state by the second special symbol, in the case of shifting during the time saving medium hit, at least after the big hit is to shift to RUSH mode The combination mode of “7” may be stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative patterns, or the combination mode of the decorative patterns may be stopped and displayed in the same configuration as in the special mode or the RUSH mode described later. You may

The normal stage and the special stage of the normal mode are performance stages that are elements that determine the performance mode in the non-probable variation/non-time saving game state, and the special mode, the RUSH mode, the probability variation hitting, and the normal hit transitioning to the normal mode. In that case, first, the special stage is shifted to, and when the special symbol game is exhausted 10 times in the special stage, the special stage is shifted to the normal stage. The normal stage and the special stage are different from each other in, for example, one or more of the decorative pattern image data, the background image data, the frequency of the effect, the appearance rate of the specific effect, and the like. It should be noted that the normal stage and the special stage are moved to each other when other transition conditions such as, for example, that the result of the jackpot determination is a predetermined result or that a predetermined time has passed, such as being established. You may do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game of the player who is playing the game in the normal mode.

The special mode is a production mode that corresponds to a probability variation/non-time saving game state, and during a probability variation hit that has transitioned from the normal mode, when a big win and a jackpot game state have ended, or during a normal hit transition from the normal mode. In, it is a production mode that shifts when the V-prize and the jackpot gaming state are finished. In addition, the special mode ends when 20 special symbol games are exhausted without shifting to the big hit game state. Further, in the special mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the starting memory information of the first special symbol described above, the big hit game state by the first special symbol is shifted. Although not shown in FIG. 7, based on the starting memory information of the second special symbol described above, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, the second special symbol is hit. It shifts to the big hit game state. In the special mode, after all of these big hit game states (“progressing hit” in FIG. 7), the RUSH mode is entered.

As a specific display mode of the decorative pattern in the special mode, the combination mode of the decorative patterns may be stopped and displayed in the same configuration as that in the normal mode described above, for example, the first special pattern. When "big hit 1" (hit pattern 1) (or "big hit 6" and "big hit 7" (hit patterns 8 and 9) of the second special symbol) is determined, as a combination mode of decorative symbols, " The combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed, and the first special symbol "big hit 2" to "big hit 6" (hit patterns 2 to 6) (or the second special symbol "big hit 8" and "big hit 9" (win When the patterns 10 and 11)) are determined, the combination mode of the decorative pattern is easily displayed as the combination mode of "1", "3", or "5", and the other combination modes are difficult to be stopped and displayed. However, when the "big hit 7" (hit pattern 7) of the first special symbol is determined, other combination modes are easily stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbols, and "1", "3" or " The combination mode of "5" may be made difficult to be stopped and displayed, and the degree of expectation of the presence/absence of a probability variation game state when shifting to the RUSH mode may be suggested.

RUSH mode is a production mode that corresponds to a probability variation/time saving game state or a non-probability variation/time saving game state. If the jackpot gaming state ends during the probability variation time/short hit transition from the normal mode, the promotion hit transition from the special mode In the production mode, when the big hit game state ends, or when the big hit game state ends during the time saving medium hit during the transition from any mode. In addition, the RUSH mode ends when 100 special symbol games are exhausted without shifting to the big hit game state, regardless of whether it is the probability variation/time saving game state or the uncertain variation/time saving game state.

Further, in the RUSH mode, based on the start memory information of the second special symbol described above, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, it is a big hit game state by the second special symbol, which is a time saving process. After hitting during the short-time, medium-time hitting, the RUSH mode is entered again. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the RUSH mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the starting memory information of the first special symbol described above, There is also a case where it shifts to the big hit game state by one special symbol hit, but after the end of this big hit game state, it is adapted to shift to the RUSH mode again.

As a specific display mode of the decorative pattern in the RUSH mode, the combination mode of the decorative patterns may be stopped and displayed in the same configuration as in the normal mode or the special mode described above, for example, the second mode. If the special symbols "big hit 6" and "big hit 7" (hit patterns 8 and 9) (or "special big hit 1" (hit pattern 1)) are determined, a combination of decorative symbols When the combination mode of “7” is stopped and displayed as the mode and the “big hit 8” (hit pattern 10) of the second special symbol is determined, the combination mode of the decorative symbol is “1”, “3” or The combination mode of "5" is likely to be stopped and displayed, other combination modes are difficult to be stopped and displayed, and when another jackpot is determined, other combination modes are easily stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative pattern. , "1", "3", or "5" combination mode may not be stopped and displayed easily, and the number of substantial rounds in the jackpot gaming state in the RUSH mode may be suggested.

The battle effect section of the RUSH mode is executed from the time of shifting to the RUSH mode, and basically continues until 87 special symbol games are exhausted. In this battle production section, the production of displaying the battle scene of the ally character (main character) and the enemy character (competitive character) is executed, and when it is decided to reach as the production content, the main character is played. The result of the jackpot determination is notified by executing the battle effect with the character and displaying the win/loss. Also, when a winning effect is executed in a specific battle effect (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" or "Special Character Battle Reach" to be described later), the history (history of completed characters) is stored and the player wins. The music related to the battle character is provided to the player. In the RUSH mode, the player can arbitrarily select the acquired music piece (acquired music piece) and play the game.

Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of enemy characters that generate a common idea are set as the battle characters. Specifically, for example, 12 battle characters (characters 1 to 12) that generate a common idea such as twelve or twelve constellations or January to December are set, and the continuation degree of the RUSH mode (that is, Depending on the number of consecutive wins in the jackpot in RUSH mode), the achievement level of the winning characters and the acquired songs is updated, or a series of stories progresses, making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the battle production section of the RUSH mode, regardless of whether the game state is the probability variation game state, the content of the production is determined in the same manner, and the variation pattern is also determined in the same manner. (See FIG. 12). That is, the battle effect section of the RUSH mode can be executed across the probability variation/shortened time gaming state and the non-probability variation/shortened time gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to continue the player's sense of expectation in the RUSH mode regardless of whether or not it is in the probability variation game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The transformation effect section in RUSH mode is executed from the end of the battle effect section in RUSH mode, and basically continues until the end of RUSH mode. In this transformation production section, in the 88th to 99th special symbol games in the RUSH mode, the above-mentioned 12 battle characters appear one by one, and whether or not the appearing battle character transforms (that is, the character The result of the big hit determination is notified by whether or not the display mode changes. Further, in the 100th special symbol game in the RUSH mode, the above-mentioned hero character appears, and whether or not the appearing hero character transforms (that is, whether or not the display mode of the character changes) is used for the jackpot determination. The result is notified.

During the probability variation time short hit, as described above, in the normal mode, it is a big hit game state by the first special symbol hit, probability variation time short hit 12R, probability variation time short hit 8R-1, probability variation time short hit 8R-2, or probability variation time short hit. This shows that the 4R has been transferred. During the probability variation short-time win, when the big win and the big hit game state ends, the game shifts to the RUSH mode as the probability variation/time saving game state, and when the non-V prize and the big hit game state end, It shifts to RUSH mode as a non-probable variation/time saving game state. In addition, during the probability variation short-time win, for example, a plurality of effect modes having different selection probabilities may be set depending on the type of big hit.

During the probability variation hit, as described above, in the normal mode, it is a big hit game state by the first special symbol hit, it indicates that the probability variation per 4R-1 or probability variation per 4R-2. Also, during the normal hit, as described above, in the normal mode, it indicates that the normal hit 8R which is a big hit game state due to the first special symbol hit. During the probability change hit or the normal hit, when the big hit and the big hit game state ends, the special mode as the probability change/non-time saving game state is entered, and the big hit game state ends with the non-V prize. In this case, it shifts to the normal mode as an uncertain variation/non-time saving game state.

During the promotion hit, as described above, in the special mode, it indicates that one of the big hit game states has been entered. During the promotion hit, when the big hit and the big hit game state ends, the game shifts to the RUSH mode as the probability change/time saving game state, and when the big hit game state ends with the non-V prize, It shifts to the RUSH mode as a probability change/time saving game state. During promotion, a plurality of effect modes having different selection probabilities may be set depending on the type of big hit.

In the RUSH mode, as described above, during the time saving medium hit, it is a big hit game state by the second special symbol, time saving medium hit 12R-1, time saving medium hit 12R-2, time saving medium hit 8R, or time saving medium hit. This shows that the 4R has been transferred. When the big win game state ends with a V win during the time saving, the game shifts to the RUSH mode as the probability variation/time saving game state, and when the big winning game state ends with a non-V prize, It shifts to RUSH mode as a non-probable variation/time saving game state. In addition, during the time saving, medium winning, for example, a plurality of effect modes having different selection probabilities may be set depending on the type of big hit.

It should be noted that, even if not illustrated and described, it is possible to shift between the effect modes with the transition of the game state and the like, and it is not limited to the range illustrated and described.

[Specifications of game machines]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the special symbol hit probability is 1/149.97 (437/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variation game state), and when the probability is high (probability variation game state). ) Is 1/19.56 (3351/65536). As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized and digested. As the probability variation performance (specification of probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 20 times as the number of games (variation number of special symbols) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol big hit pattern "big hit 1", the big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) is a hit pattern 1, and the round number of the round game is 12R (of which the actual number of easy winning holes is the big winning opening). 12R) is given, and a round that facilitates V winning is set at the 4th R, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the time shortening gaming state is set (probable variation time shortening 12R). The probability (rush rate) of "big hit 1" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 12/100.

The first special symbol big hit symbol "big hit 2" becomes the hit pattern 2, round number 8R (of which the actual round number 4R) is given, and the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4R, and the big hit game state. After the end, it becomes a time saving game state (probably variable time saving per 8R-1). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol “big hit 2” of the first special symbol is set to 3/100.

The jackpot pattern "big hit 3" of the first special symbol is a hit pattern 3 and a round number 8R (of which the actual round number 4R) is given, and a round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4R, and the jackpot gaming state is set. After the end, it becomes a time saving game state (8R-2 per probability variation time saving). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 3" of the first special symbol is set to 2/100.

The big hit symbol "big hit 4" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 4, and the number of rounds 4R (of which the actual number of rounds 4R) is given, and the round in which the V winning is easy is set to the 4R, and the big hit game state is set. After the end, it becomes a time saving game state (4R per probability variable time saving). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 4" of the first special symbol is set to 3/100.

The big hit symbol "big hit 5" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 5, and the number of rounds 4R (of which the actual number of rounds 4R) is given. After the jackpot game state transitioned from the time saving game state, it does not become the time saving game state but becomes the non-time saving game state. However, after the end of the non-probability variable/time saving game state, the probability variation/non-time saving game state, and the jackpot game state transitioned from the probability variation/time saving game state, it becomes the time saving game state (4R-1 per probability variation). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 5" of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

The big hit pattern "big hit 6" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 6, and a round number 4R (of which the actual round number 4R) is given, and a round in which V winning is easy is set to the 4R, uncertain change/non-change. After the jackpot game state transitioned from the time saving game state, it does not become the time saving game state but becomes the non-time saving game state. However, after the end of the non-probability variable/time saving game state, the probability variation/non-time saving game state, and the big hit game state that has transitioned from the probability variation/time saving game state, it becomes the time saving game state (probability variation per 4R-2). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 6" of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

The big hit pattern "big hit 7" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 7, and 8R of rounds (of which 7R of actual rounds) are given, and no round is set to facilitate V winnings. After the jackpot game state transitioned from the time saving game state, it does not become the time saving game state but becomes the non-time saving game state. However, after the end of the non-probability variable/time saving game state, the probability variation/non-time saving game state, and the probability variation/time saving game state, the big hit game state becomes the time saving game state (normally 8R). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 7" of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

In the special jackpot "big jackpot 6" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 8 and the round number 12R (of which the actual round number 12R) is given, and the round in which the V winning is easy is set to the 4R, and the jackpot is in the gaming state. After the end, it becomes a time saving game state (12R-1 per hour saving time). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 6" of the second special symbol is set to 9/100.

In the special jackpot pattern "big hit 7" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern 9 is given, the round number 12R (of which the actual round number 12R) is given, and the round in which the V winning is easy is set to the 4R, and the jackpot is in the gaming state. After the end, it becomes a time saving game state (12R-2 per hour saving time). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 7" of the second special symbol is set to 3/100.

In the special jackpot pattern "big hit 8" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 10, the round number 8R (of which the actual round number 8R) is given, and the round that facilitates the V winning is set to the 4R, and the jackpot is in the gaming state. After the end, it becomes a time saving game state (8 R per hour saving time). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 8" of the second special symbol is set to 45/100.

In the special jackpot pattern "big hit 9" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern 11 is provided, the number of rounds 4R (of which the actual number of rounds 4R) is given, and the round in which the V winning is easy is set to the 4R, and the jackpot gaming state is set. After the end, it becomes a time saving game state (4 R per hour saving time). The inrush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 9" of the second special symbol is set to 43/100.

The special winning opening count number is set so as to count up to 8 for each of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 as the upper limit number of winnings per round. As the time saving performance (specification of the time saving game state), the time saving game state is set to continue up to 100 times. The number of prize balls will be 3 per winning prize in the first starting opening 32, 3 per winning in the second starting opening 33, and 4 or 3 per winning in the general winning opening 40. Therefore, it is set that there are 14 prizes per prize in the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37).

The normal symbol hit probability is set to 1/65536 when the probability is low, and 65534/65536 when the probability is high. Although not shown in FIG. 8, the number of hit symbols of the normal symbols is set to 2 (sorting 1/2).

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening/closing patterns A to D are defined as opening/closing patterns for one round (one-round opening/closing pattern) at the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. In addition, in this embodiment, there is a case in which the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are both referred to simply as "big winning opening". The open/close patterns A to D shown in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and the specific time or the like for defining the open/close pattern may be other than that shown.

The open/close pattern A is an open/close pattern in which the open state of the first special winning opening 36 (special winning opening 1) continues for 27.996 s. In the opening/closing pattern A, a period from the first open state to the final closed state is defined as a round section. Similarly, in other opening/closing patterns, the round section is defined as the period from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section where the open state is 27.996s, the open state of the first special winning opening 36 is a relatively long open state. That is, in the opening/closing pattern A, the long opening of the first special winning opening 36 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern A is 27.996 s.

The open/close pattern B is an open/close pattern in which the open state of the first special winning opening 36 (special winning opening 1) continues only for 0.102 s. The section in which the open state is 0.102 s is a short open state in which the open state of the first special winning opening 36 is relatively short. That is, in the opening/closing pattern B, the short opening of the first special winning opening 36 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern B is 0.102 s.

The opening/closing pattern C is an opening/closing pattern in which the second winning opening 37 (big winning opening 2) is initially open for 0.048 s, is closed for 3 s, and is then opened again for 27.948 s. .. In the section where the open state is 0.048s, the open state of the second special winning opening 37 is a relatively short short open, and in the section where the open state is 27.948s, the open state of the second special winning opening 37 is It will be a relatively long long opening. That is, in the opening/closing pattern C, the short opening of the second special winning opening 37 occurs once, and then the long opening occurs once after passing through the closed state, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern C is 27. It becomes .996s. In addition, in the open state where the short opening is made, it becomes extremely difficult to win the game ball to the big winning opening, while in the open state where the long opening is made, it is possible and easy to win the game ball to the big winning opening. ing. Such short circuit opening is also the same in the opening/closing pattern D described later.

The opening/closing pattern D is an opening/closing pattern in which the open state of the second special winning opening 37 (special winning opening 2) continues only for 0.048 s. In the section where the open state is 0.048 s, the open state of the second special winning opening 37 is a relatively short open state. That is, in the opening/closing pattern D, the short opening of the second special winning opening 37 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern D is 0.048 s.

In this way, the substantial round game in the big hit game state corresponds to the round game when the opening and closing is controlled based on the opening and closing pattern A or C described above. Then, the round game when the opening and closing is controlled based on the opening and closing pattern B or D is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the substantive round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open/closed state of the second special winning opening 37. As shown in FIG. 10, as a general rule, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern) is 0.036 s in which the specific region 38A is opened for the first time, and then the specific region 38A is closed. Is defined as an operating pattern in which the operating period continues for a maximum of 29.144 s after that. The total actuation time of the displacement member actuation pattern is 29.180 s. During the operation period of 0.036 s, the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively short, so that it is extremely difficult to win the V prize in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 29.144 s at the longest, the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively long, so that V winning in the specific area 38A becomes relatively easy. However, for the maximum operation period of 29.144 s, the second special winning opening 37 is closed in one round when the second special winning opening 37 is in the open/closed state, for example, when the maximum winning opening count reaches the upper limit winning number. When a predetermined monitoring processing time regarding the remaining balls described later has elapsed, the displacement member 39 is inactivated and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined maximum length of 29.144 s has elapsed. May be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the control for substantially facilitating or making difficult the V winning is performed by activating/deactivating the displacement member 39, and the specific area switch 380A activates/deactivates the changing member 39. It is possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A regardless of the operation. That is, the period during which the V winning is valid is not set. However, the mode of control that facilitates or makes it difficult to win the V prize is not limited to this. For example, the detection state of the specific area switch 380A is changed in conjunction with the operation/non-operation of the displacement member 39. It may be. Specifically, when the transition member 39 is operating (in the open state), the specific area switch 380A makes it possible to detect that the game ball has passed the specific area 38A, and the transition member 39 operates. If not (in the closed state), the specific area switch 380A may not be able to detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A. That is, the period during which the V winning is valid may be set. In this case, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A during a period other than the period in which the V winning is valid, the V winning does not occur and it is possible not to shift to the probability variation gaming state.

[Prize winning opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11, as the special winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern), a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 11 are defined. The hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern corresponding to a probability variation short time win of 12R, and the number of rounds defined as a round that is in an open state (hereinafter, referred to as a “specified round number”) is 12R, which is a winning combination. This is a winning pattern in which the actual number of rounds that allows winning is defined as 12R. In addition, the interval between rounds is the interval where the special winning opening is closed after the big winning opening is closed in one round until the first big opening is opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the patterns of the intervals between rounds, the interval pattern a in which the closed state time (closing time) is 2034 ms, the interval pattern b in which it is 300 ms, and the interval pattern c in which it is 3000 ms. And are specified. In the hit pattern 1, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as interval pattern b, the inter-round intervals of the fourth and fifth rounds are defined as interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as interval pattern a. There is. Further, it is defined that the second special winning opening 37 has the opening/closing pattern C at the 4th R, and the first special winning opening 36 has the opening/closing pattern A at the 1R-3R and the 5R-12R. That is, the winning pattern 1 is 12 rounds in which the number of actual rounds is 1R to 12R, and only the 4Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit patterns 2 and 3 are hit patterns corresponding to a probability variation short time 8R-1 and a probability variation time short hit 8R-2, and are defined as a defined round number of 8R, of which the actual round number is defined as 4R. In hit patterns 2 and 3, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as interval pattern b, the inter-round intervals of fourth and fifth rounds are defined as interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as interval pattern a. Has been done. Further, it is defined that the second special winning opening 37 has the opening/closing pattern C at the 4th R and the first special winning opening 36 has the opening/closing pattern A at the 1R-3rd. That is, in the hit patterns 2 and 3, the actual round number is four rounds of the first round to the fourth round, and only the fourth round is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern corresponding to the probability variation short time hit 4R, in which the specified round number is 4R and the actual round number is defined as 4R. In the hit pattern 4, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the second special winning opening 37 has the opening/closing pattern C at the 4th R and the first special winning opening 36 has the opening/closing pattern A at the 1R-3rd. That is, in the hit pattern 4, the actual number of rounds is four rounds of the first round to the fourth round, and only the fourth round is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit patterns 5 and 6 are hit patterns corresponding to the probability variation 4R-1 and the probability variation 4R-2, and are the hit patterns in which the defined round number is 4R and the actual round number is defined as 4R. In the hit pattern 4, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the second special winning opening 37 has the opening/closing pattern C at the 4th R and the first special winning opening 36 has the opening/closing pattern A at the 1R-3rd. That is, in the hit pattern 4, the actual number of rounds is four rounds of the first round to the fourth round, and only the fourth round is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern corresponding to a normal hit 8R, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is defined as 7R. In the hit pattern 7, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as interval pattern b, the inter-round intervals of the fourth and fifth rounds are defined as interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as interval pattern a. There is. Further, it is defined that the first special winning opening 36 has the opening/closing pattern A in the 1R to 3R eyes and the 5R to 8R eyes. That is, in the hit pattern 7, the actual number of rounds is 7 rounds of 1R to 3R and 5R to 8R, and the round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit patterns 8 and 9 are hit patterns corresponding to 12R-1 for short working hours and 12R-2 for short working hours, and are hit patterns in which the specified round number is 12R and the actual round number is 12R. In the hit patterns 8 and 9, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as interval pattern b, the inter-round intervals of the fourth and fifth rounds are defined as interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as interval pattern a. Has been done. Further, it is defined that the second special winning opening 37 has the opening/closing pattern C at the 4th R, and the first special winning opening 36 has the opening/closing pattern A at the 1R-3R and the 5R-12R. That is, the winning patterns 8 and 9 are 12 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is 1R to 12R, and only the 4Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 10 is a hit pattern corresponding to 8R per time saving, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is 8R. In the hit pattern 10, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as interval pattern b, the inter-round intervals of the fourth and fifth rounds are defined as interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as interval pattern a. There is. Further, it is defined that the second special winning opening 37 has an opening/closing pattern C in the 4th R and the first special winning opening 36 has an opening/closing pattern A in the 1R-3R and the 5R-8R. That is, in the hit pattern 10, the actual number of rounds is 8 rounds of 1R to 8R, and only the 4Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 11 is a hit pattern corresponding to 4R for shortening working hours, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 4R and the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the hit pattern 11, the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds are defined as the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the second special winning opening 37 has the opening/closing pattern C at the 4th R and the first special winning opening 36 has the opening/closing pattern A at the 1R-3rd. That is, the winning pattern 11 is four rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the first round to the fourth round, and only the fourth round is executed as a round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

In addition, in the hit patterns 1 to 6 and 8 to 11, a round (specific second round game) in which it is easy to win V in the specific area 38A is executed only in the 4th R, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, the specific second round game may be executed in another round (1st to 3rd eyes and 5th to 12th eyes). In addition, in these hit patterns, a plurality of specific second round games may be executed. In addition, in each of the above-described hit patterns including these hit patterns, the second special winning opening 37 is opened, but a round (normal second round game) in which it is difficult to win the V prize in the specific area 38A is executed. May be Further, in FIG. 11, as the inter-round interval, a portion where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b or c, and a portion where the interval pattern b is defined is defined as the interval pattern a or c. Alternatively, the location where the interval pattern c is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a or b. That is, various modifications can be made according to the effect mode in the effect mode of the big hit game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled by the hit patterns 1, 8 and 9, the actual number of rounds is 12, so that the number of game media that the player can obtain (the expected number of wins) When the big hit game state is controlled by the hit pattern 10, the actual number of rounds is 8, so the number of expected expected game media is the second largest, and the hit pattern 7 is the big hit game. When the state is controlled, since the actual number of rounds is 7, the number of expected expected game media is the third largest, and when the big hit game state is controlled by other hit patterns, the actual number of rounds is 4. Since it is a round, the number of expected expected game media is the smallest.

However, the manner in which the number of expected game media to be acquired is different is not limited to this. For example, by differentiating the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the first big winning opening 36 and the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 37, an expected game to be won The number of media may be different. Specifically, the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the first special winning opening 36 is eight, and the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the second special winning opening 37 is four. To do. Then, when the second round game can be executed a plurality of times as described above, in the hit pattern 9, the number of times the second round game is executed is made larger than that in the hit pattern 8. Further, for example, the number of expected game media to be acquired may be made different by making the upper limit number of winnings of the first special winning opening 36 and the upper limit of winning number of the second special winning opening 37 different. Specifically, the maximum winning number of the first special winning opening 36 is set to 8 and the maximum winning number of the second special winning opening 37 is set to 4. Then, when the second round game can be executed a plurality of times as described above, in the hit pattern 9, the number of times the second round game is executed is made larger than that in the hit pattern 8. Even in this case, the number of expected game media to be acquired can be varied.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the table defines lottery value (random number) information for determining predetermined items based on a lottery value (random number) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. The value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”.

<Main fluctuation pattern determination table>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the main fluctuation pattern determination table. The main variation pattern determination table is for the main CPU 61 to determine the mode of variation display and stop display of the special symbol (variation pattern), and the time from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display (variation time). It is a table used, gaming state (non-probability variation/non-time saving game state corresponding to normal mode, probability variation/non-time saving game state corresponding to special mode, or probability variation/time saving game state or non-probability variation/time saving corresponding to RUSH mode Type of variation pattern determined according to various parameters such as game state), jackpot determination result (win/win), reach determination random number range (0 to 250), and effect selection random number range (0 to 99) Is defined, and if the game state is a probability variation/time saving game state or a non-probability variation/time saving game state corresponding to the RUSH mode, is the number of games "1 to 87 times" (RUSH mode battle Different variation pattern types are defined depending on whether it is an effect section), or "88 to 99" or "100 times" (is it a transformation effect section in the RUSH mode).

The main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern and variation time by using the main variation pattern determination table, thereby determining the variation content of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54. At the same time, by transmitting a variation pattern designation command capable of recognizing the variation content of this special symbol to the sub CPU 71, the sub CPU 71 can perform a variable display and a stop display of the decorative symbol linked to the variation content of the special symbol. Has become. Note that the main fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is an example, and the fluctuation pattern, fluctuation time, and other elements to be determined are not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern is further subdivided, and the look-ahead pending change pattern (see FIGS. 13 and 14) described later, the variation pending change pattern (see FIGS. 15 and 16), or the pseudo-relation (during the variation of the special symbol, the decorative pattern It is also possible to determine the number of times (pseudo-stationary number) at which a temporary stop/re-variation is performed, which is performed as if a pseudo-variation of symbols was performed a plurality of times). That is, when the main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern, these elements can be determined.

The reach determination random number range defines a range of reach determination random numbers for determining whether or not to reach. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start opening 32 or the second start opening 33 in each game state. In addition, the effect selection random number range defines a range of effect selection random numbers that determines the variation pattern, the variation time, and the effect content with respect to the reach determination random number range. The effect selection random number value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start opening 32 or the second start opening 33 in each game state.

In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, for example, in the normal mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach, it is determined as a variation pattern with a selectivity of 20/100. “08H” is selected. The variation pattern “08H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 120,000 ms (120 s) and the effect content is “operation linked effect success→super reach C loss”. When "08H" is selected as the variation pattern, the operation-linked effect described later is executed, and the effect is developed after the operation-linked effect is executed (operation-linked effect success), compared with other reach effects. A super-reach C effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed, and it is shown that the result of the jackpot determination is lost without finally displaying the decorative pattern in a specific display mode.

Further, in the normal mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined not to execute the reach, “04H” is selected as the variation pattern with the selectivity of 10/100. The variation pattern “04H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 30,000 ms (30 s) and the effect content is “operation linked effect failure”. When "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, the operation-linked effect described later is executed, but the effect does not develop after the operation-linked effect is executed (operation-linked effect failure), and the decorative pattern is finally specified. The result of the jackpot determination is shown to be lost without the display mode of.

Further, in the normal mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, “12H” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 30/100. The variation pattern “12H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 121000 ms (121 s) and the effect content is “operation linked effect success→per super reach C”. When "12H" is selected as the variation pattern, the operation-linked effect described later is executed, and the effect is developed after the operation-linked effect is executed (operation-linked effect success), compared with other reach effects. A super-reach C effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed, and finally, the decorative pattern becomes a specific display mode to show that the result of the jackpot determination is a hit.

In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, in the special mode, the variation pattern is determined in the same manner as in the normal mode, and description of the determined variation pattern, variation time, and effect contents is omitted. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the special mode, the above-described variation patterns may be determined with different selection probabilities, or one or more variation patterns unique to the special mode may be set.

In addition, when the result of the big hit determination is a miss in the 1st to 87th times of the RUSH mode and it is decided to execute the reach, “14H” is selected as the variation pattern with the selectivity of 50/100. To be done. The variation pattern "14H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 100,000 ms (100 s) and the effect content is "Kakeko Battle Reach Loss". When "14H" is selected as the variation pattern, an effect is produced in which the opponent character and the main character are battled by a race in a determined order of the scenario in the RUSH mode described below or by a lottery. As a result, the main character is defeated and the result of the jackpot determination is shown to be lost.

If the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the 1st to 87th RUSH modes, “17H” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 50/100. The variation pattern “17H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 101000 ms (101 s) and the effect content is “per play battle reach”. When "17H" is selected as the variation pattern, an effect is produced in which the opponent character and the protagonist character determined in the RUSH mode scenario, which will be described later, or in a lottery battle the battle character with a race. As a result, it is shown that the main character wins and the result of the jackpot judgment is a win.

When the result of the big hit determination is a hit in the 1st to 87th RUSH modes, “18H” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 10/100. The variation pattern “18H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 81000 ms (81 s) and the effect content is “per special character battle reach”. When "18H" is selected as the variation pattern, the character 1 is selected as the opponent character regardless of the determination order of the scenario in the RUSH mode to be described later, and the effect that the character 1 and the hero character battle with each other is executed. At the same time, the result of the race shows that the main character wins and the result of the jackpot judgment is a hit. It should be noted that the effect contents of the battle effect to be executed may be made different between "kakekko battle reach hit" and "special character battle reach hit". Further, the variation pattern "18H" should be selected only when the result of the jackpot determination is a specific jackpot that gives the most profit (for example, 12R-1 or 12R-2 per hour saving time). May be. In other words, the effect of "per special character battle reach" may be an effect in which the particular big hit with the most profit to be provided is determined.

In addition, in the 88th to 99th times of the RUSH mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach, “19H” is selected as the variation pattern with the selectivity of 50/100. To be done. The variation pattern “19H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 10,000 ms (10 s) and the effect content is “normal reach (transformation failure) loss”. If "19H" is selected as the variation pattern, whether or not the opponent character (for example, the character 1 for the 88th time, the character 12 for the 99th time) is transformed according to the number of games in the RUSH mode (display A transformation effect that indicates whether or not the aspect changes) is executed, and finally it does not transform (the display aspect does not change) (transformation failure), and it is shown that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It is like this.

Further, in the 88th to 99th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, “21H” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 50/100. The variation pattern “21H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 11000 ms (11 s) and the effect content is “per normal reach (successful transformation)”. When "21H" is selected as the variation pattern, whether or not the opponent character (for example, the character 1 for the 88th time, ... the character 12 for the 99th time) is transformed depending on the number of games in the RUSH mode (display A transformation effect indicating whether or not the mode changes) is executed, and finally the mode is changed (the display mode changes) (transformation success), and the result of the big hit judgment is shown to be a win. Has become.

In the 88th to 99th times in the RUSH mode, the variation pattern in which the transformation effect is always performed may be selected. That is, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, an effect in which the opponent character fails to transform according to the number of games in the RUSH mode is executed, and when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, the game in the RUSH mode is performed. You may make it perform the effect|action that the battle character according to the number turns into a successful transformation. With such a configuration, even if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, since the production in which all the opponent characters appear is executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered, and It is possible to improve the interest of the production using a plurality of characters.

If the result of the big hit determination is a loss at the 100th time in the RUSH mode, “23H” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 100/100. The variation pattern “23H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 15000 ms (15 s) and the effect content is “transformation failure (loose)→ball display”. When "23H" is selected as the variation pattern, a transformation effect indicating whether or not the main character is transformed (whether or not the display mode is changed) is executed, and finally the transformation is not performed (display. The result of the jackpot determination is shown to be lost without changing the mode) (transformation failure). When the transformation fails, the number of game balls acquired during the RUSH mode is displayed.

When the result of the big hit determination is a hit at the 100th time of the RUSH mode, “24H” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 100/100. The variation pattern “24H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is “transformation success (win)”. When "24H" is selected as the variation pattern, a transformation effect indicating whether or not the hero character transforms (whether or not the display mode changes) is executed, and finally transforms (display mode). Is changed) (successful transformation), and the result of the jackpot determination is shown to be a hit.

<Prefetch pending change pattern determination table>
13 and 14 are diagrams illustrating an example of the prefetch pending change pattern determination table. The pre-reading hold change pattern determination table is a table referred to in a hold display mode change effect process (see FIG. 53 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and is a result of the big hit determination (winning), the first special symbol game or the first. 2 The type of the read-ahead hold change pattern (read-ahead hold change effect content) that is determined according to various parameters such as the number of hold (holding number) of the special symbol game, the variation pattern, and the sub-effect selection random number range It is prescribed. Specific control of the prefetching pending change effect using the table will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, each of the first special symbol starting memory (holding ball) is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the first holding ball display area 701, the starting of the second special symbol. Of the holding balls displayed in the second holding ball display area 702 for displaying each of the stored numbers (holding number) in a predetermined display mode and the first holding ball display area 701 or the second holding ball display area 702, The variable hold ball display area 703 for displaying the hold ball that is consumed in the current game (the change) in a predetermined display mode is provided (see FIG. 61 described later), and any of these effect modes can be used. The reservation ball of is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the starting opening (first starting opening 32 and second starting opening 33), whether or not to hit, the kind of hit, and the contents of the effect are predetermined. Is becoming

The read-ahead pending change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 show the display mode of the reserved balls displayed in the first reserved sphere display area 701 and the second reserved sphere display area 702 before the variation is exhausted. It is used to determine whether or not to change, and the so-called "pre-reading effect" can be used to notify the big hit expectation degree by changing the display mode of the reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the display mode of the reserved ball, the display mode (white), the display mode (blue), the display mode (yellow), the display mode (green), the display mode (red), and the display mode ( A rainbow) is provided, and the display mode (white) is the normal display mode. The big hit expectation degree (that is, the result of the big hit determination is a win) is lowest in the display mode (white), and the display mode (blue), the display mode (yellow), the display mode (green), and the display mode (red). ), the higher it gets. The display mode (rainbow) is such that the big hit is confirmed. Of course, the display mode (rainbow) has a very high jackpot expectation, but the jackpot is not fixed, and may appear even when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

In the look-ahead pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the number of starting memories (holding number) of the first special symbol is “1”, and as a variation pattern When "05H" is determined, "prefetch pending change pattern 104" is selected as the prefetch pending change pattern with a selection rate of 11/100. When the "read-ahead hold change pattern 104" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting opening 32, the hold mode of the display mode (blue) is set as the hold ball used in the next variation. The sphere is displayed in the first reserved sphere display area 701, and when the fluctuation indicated by the reserved sphere starts, an effect of changing the reserved sphere to the display mode (yellow) is performed.

The "prefetching pending change pattern 104" is, for example, a display mode (a normal display mode) as a reserved ball used in the next variation when the game ball passes through the first starting opening 32 ( The reserved ball of (white) is displayed in the first reserved ball display area 701, the reserved ball is changed to the display mode (blue) before the fluctuation indicated by the reserved ball starts, and the fluctuation indicated by the reserved ball starts. Occasionally, an effect of changing the reserved ball to the display mode (yellow) may be performed. That is, if the selected read-ahead hold change pattern is to change the display mode of the hold ball from the beginning, the hold is held at any timing from when the game ball passes through the starting opening until before the fluctuation starts. The display mode of the sphere may be changed. The same applies to other read-ahead pending change patterns.

Further, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a miss, the starting memory number (holding number) of the first special symbol is "4", and if the variation pattern is "05H", 1 The “read-ahead hold change pattern 405” is selected as the read-ahead hold change pattern at a selection rate of /100. When the “read-ahead hold change pattern 405” is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting opening 32, the hold ball used in the variation after four times is shown as a normal display mode. When a reserved sphere having a certain display mode (white) is displayed in the first reserved sphere display area 701, the reserved sphere is changed to the display mode (blue) when the next fluctuation starts, and when the next fluctuation starts. The hold ball is changed to a display mode (yellow), the hold ball is changed to a display mode (green) when the next fluctuation starts, and the hold ball is displayed when the fluctuation indicated by the hold ball starts. An effect of changing the mode (red) is performed.

In the look-ahead pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a win, the number of starting memories (holding number) of the first special symbol is “1”, and as a variation pattern When "09H" is determined, "prefetch pending change pattern 111" is selected as the preread pending change pattern at a selection rate of 1/100. When the "read-ahead hold change pattern 111" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 32, the hold mode of the display mode (blue) is set as the hold ball used in the next variation. The sphere is displayed in the first reserved sphere display area 701, and when the fluctuation indicated by the reserved sphere starts, an effect of changing the reserved sphere to the display mode (rainbow) is performed. As described above, the look-ahead hold change pattern of the present embodiment is not limited to the look-ahead hold change pattern in which the display mode is sequentially changed in the order of the big hit expectation degree described above, and the big hit expectation degree is changed in multiple steps by one change. The pre-reading pending change pattern for changing the display mode is included.

Further, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a win, the starting memory number (holding number) of the first special symbol is "4", and if "09H" is determined as the variation pattern, 1 The “read-ahead hold change pattern 416” is selected as the read-ahead hold change pattern at a selection rate of /100. When the “read-ahead hold change pattern 416” is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting opening 32, the hold ball used in the variation after four times is shown as a normal display mode. When a reserved sphere having a certain display mode (blue) is displayed in the first reserved sphere display area 701, the reserved sphere is changed to the display mode (yellow) when the next fluctuation starts, and when the next fluctuation starts. The hold ball is changed to a display mode (green), the hold ball is changed to a display mode (red) when the next fluctuation starts, and the hold ball is displayed when the fluctuation indicated by the hold ball starts. An effect of changing to a mode (rainbow) is performed.

<Fluctuation hold change pattern determination table>
15 and 16 are diagrams showing an example of the fluctuation pending change pattern determination table. The fluctuation hold change pattern determination table is a table that is referred to in the hold display mode change effect process (see FIG. 53 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and is a result of the big hit determination (win/win) and a pseudo-link that is performed in the change. Of the number (pseudo consecutive number) of, the variation pattern, and the type of the variation hold change pattern (contents of the variation hold change production) that is determined according to various parameters such as a random number range for sub effect selection. .. Specific control of the variation hold change effect using the table will be described later.

The fluctuation pending change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 determines whether to change the display mode of the pending balls displayed in the fluctuation pending ball display area 703 when the fluctuations are consumed. It is used for the purpose, and it is possible to notify the big hit expectation degree by changing the display mode of the reserved ball.

In the variation hold change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the number of pseudo runs (the number of pseudo runs) performed in the change is “1”, and When "05H" is determined as the pattern, and the current display mode of the reserved ball is the display mode (blue), the variation suspension change pattern is " "Variation pending change pattern 205" is selected. When the “variation hold change pattern 205” is selected, when the hold ball in the display mode (blue) is displayed in the change hold ball display area 703 as the hold ball used in the change. At the time of executing the first pseudo-run (pseudo-run 1), the effect of changing the reserved ball to the display mode (yellow) is performed.

Note that the “prefetch pending change pattern 205” indicates, for example, a pending sphere used in the fluctuation, and the pending sphere in the display mode (white) that is a normal display mode before the fluctuation starts is the fluctuation pending. When being displayed in the sphere display area 703, the holding sphere is changed to a display mode (blue) at the start of the fluctuation, and the holding sphere is displayed when the first pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 1). An effect of changing the mode (yellow) may be performed. That is, the fluctuation hold change pattern may be a hold change pattern that produces an effect of changing the display mode of the hold ball between before the change starts and when the change starts. The same applies to the other fluctuation-holding change patterns.

For example, in FIG. 15, when the pseudo-repeated number, which is not shown in FIG. 15, is the fluctuation pending change pattern, when the display mode of the pending ball before the start of the fluctuation is the display mode (white) , When the variation hold change pattern for changing the display mode of the hold ball at the start of the change to the display mode (blue), or the display mode of the hold ball before the start of the change is the display mode (blue), It is possible to set the fluctuation holding change pattern or the like that changes the display mode of the reserved ball at the start of the fluctuation to the display mode (green).

Also, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a miss, the number of pseudo runs (the number of pseudo runs) performed in the change is "4", and "05H" is determined as the change pattern. Then, when the current display mode of the reserved balls is the display mode (white), the “variation pending change pattern 505” is selected as the variation pending change pattern at a selection rate of 10/100. When the “variation hold change pattern 505” is selected, when the hold ball in the display mode (white) is displayed in the change hold ball display area 703 as the hold ball used in the change. When the first pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 1), the reserved ball is changed to a display mode (blue), and when the second pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 2), the reserved ball is displayed ( Yellow), and when the third pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 3), the hold ball is changed to a display mode (green), and when the fourth pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 4), the hold ball The effect of changing to the display mode (red) is performed.

In the variation hold change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a hit, the number of pseudo runs (the number of pseudo runs) performed in the change is “1”, and When “09H” is determined as the pattern and the current display mode of the reserved balls is the display mode (green), the variation reservation change pattern “corresponding "Variation pending change pattern 212" is selected. When the “variation hold change pattern 212” is selected, when the hold sphere in the display mode (green) is displayed in the change hold sphere display area 703 as the hold sphere used in the change. At the time of executing the first pseudo-run (pseudo-run 1), an effect of changing the reserved ball to the display mode (rainbow) is performed. As described above, in the variation holding change pattern of the present embodiment, not only the variation holding change pattern in which the display mode is sequentially changed in the order of the big hit expectation degree described above, but the one big change causes the big hit expectation degree to change in multiple stages. The change hold change pattern for changing the display mode is included.

Also, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a hit, the number of pseudo runs (the number of pseudo runs) performed in the variation is "4", and "09H" is determined as the variation pattern. Then, when the current display mode of the reserved balls is the display mode (white), “the fluctuation pending change pattern 510” is selected as the fluctuation pending change pattern at a selection rate of 10/100. When the "variation hold change pattern 510" is selected, when the hold sphere in the display mode (blue) is displayed in the change hold sphere display area 703 as the hold sphere used in the change. When the first pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 1), the hold ball is changed to a display mode (yellow), and when the second pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 2), the hold ball is displayed mode ( Change to green), the holding ball changes to a display mode (red) when the third pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 3), and the hold ball is executed when the fourth pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 4). Is displayed in the form of a rainbow.

<Operation linked production scenario decision table>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the operation-linked effect scenario determination table. The operation-linked effect scenario determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal mode processing (see FIG. 52 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and is a jackpot determination result (winning prize), a variation pattern, and a sub effect selection random number range. Information (operation-linked effect scenario) for managing the effect contents in the operation-linked effect that is determined according to various parameters such as is defined. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 21, the lottery value information when the random number range (probability denominator) is 32768 is defined. For example, the lottery rate when the lottery value is 32768 is 32768/32768. That is, it becomes 100%.

In the operation-linked production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, scenario 1 (success) to scenario 5 (success) that may be finally successful as the production content of the operation-linked production, and the final production content of the operation-linked production. In the case where scenario 6 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure) that are not likely to be successful (failure) are defined and “08H” or “12H” is determined as the variation pattern, If any one of scenario 1 (success) to scenario 5 (success) is determined by lottery and “04H” is determined as the variation pattern, any of scenario 6 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure). That scenario is decided by lottery. The contents of each scenario will be described later with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 17, when the variation pattern is “08H” or “12H”, the scenario 1 (success) is determined by the lottery rate of 7768/32768, and the scenario 2( is determined by the lottery rate of 7000/32768. Success) is determined, and one of scenario 3 (success) to scenario 5 (success) is determined with a lottery rate of 6000/32768. The lottery rate may be different depending on whether "08H" is determined as the variation pattern or "12H" is determined as the variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern is “08H” (that is, when the jackpot determination result is a loss), the variation pattern is “12H” (that is, when the jackpot determination result is a hit). In this case, the lottery rate may be defined such that a specific scenario (for example, scenario 2 (success)) is determined with a higher probability.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, when “04H” is determined as the variation pattern, scenario 6 (failure) is determined by the lottery rate of 7768/32768, and scenario 7 (failure) is determined by the lottery rate of 7000/32768. Is determined, and any one of scenario 8 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure) is determined with a lottery rate of 6000/32768.

<Operation linked production stage transition decision table>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the operation-linked effect stage transition determination table. The operation-linked effect stage transition determination table is a table that is referred to in the pressing operation button operation determination processing (see FIGS. 45 and 46 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and the current step, the type of operation-linked effect scenario, and Information (presence/absence of stage transition) for determining whether or not to shift the stage of the production in the operation-linked production is defined according to various parameters such as the sub production selection random number range and the like. Specific control of the operation-linked effect using the table will be described later.

In the operation-linked production stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18, when the press operation button 9A is operated for each determined operation-linked production scenario (see FIG. 17), the stage transitions from the current stage to the next stage. The lottery value to be determined (stage transition “present”) and the fact that the current stage is not shifted to the next stage (stage transition “absent”) are determined when the push operation button 9A is operated. The lottery value is defined, and whether or not to shift the stage is determined according to which range the sub effect selection random number range belongs to.

For example, when "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario, and the current stage is "0" or "1" when the push operation button 9A is operated, The lottery rate of 24576/32768 determines the stage transition “present”, and the lottery rate of 8192/32768 determines the stage transition “absent”. If the current stage is any of "2" to "5", the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, and the stage transition "No" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768. To be done. If the current stage is "6", the stage shift "present" is determined by the lottery rate of 14107/32768, and the stage shift "absence" is determined by the lottery rate of 18661/32768. If the current stage is any of "8" to "11", the stage shift "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, and the stage shift "No" is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768. To be done. When the current stage is “7”, whether or not to shift the stage is not determined by lottery, and when the push operation button 9A is operated after a predetermined transition condition described below is satisfied, It has been decided to move between stages. However, in the operation interlocking effect stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18, when the push operation button 9A is operated after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the stage transition “present” is determined by the lottery rate of 32768/32768. If the push operation button 9A is operated before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the stage transition “absence” is determined at the lottery rate of 32768/32768, The stage transition “present” may be configured not to be determined.

Here, the stage “7” in “scenario 1 (success)” is set as a conditional stage transition period. The conditional stage transition period is provided so that, among the stages in the operation-linked production scenario, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated after a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the stage is necessarily transitioned to the next stage. In this embodiment, the predetermined transition condition is that the conditional stage transition period has elapsed. That is, in the present embodiment, for example, when the stage “7” in “scenario 1 (success)” is entered, a conditional stage transition period (eg, 90 frames of images can be displayed 1.5). Until the second (1500 ms)) elapses, it is not decided to shift the stage even when the push operation button 9A is operated, but the push operation button 9A is operated after the lapse of the conditional stage transition period. In some cases, it is inevitable that the stage transition will be decided. Further, if the pressing operation button 9A is not operated even after the lapse of the conditional stage transition period, the stage transition is not decided. In “Scenario 2 (Success)” in stages “7” and “11”, “Scenario 4 (Success)”, “Scenario 5 (Success)”, “Scenario 9 (Failure)”, and “Scenario 10 (Failure)” The stage "7" in the stages "8", "scenario 6 (failure)" and "scenario 7 (failure)" is also set as the conditional stage transition period. On the other hand, in “scenario 3 (success)” and “scenario 8 (failure)”, the conditional stage transition period is not set, and the stage is transitioned when the push operation button 9A is operated in all stages. Whether or not to do it is decided by lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the operation-linked effect, by providing the effect stage set as the conditional step transition period, the predetermined period (conditional step transition period) in the process of the effect stage transition is Since it is possible to create a state that does not necessarily shift to a stage, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player who was able to smoothly shift the stage to that stage, and it is possible to diversify the stage. ..

The predetermined transition condition is not limited to the above. For example, as the predetermined transition condition, it is possible to employ that the pressing operation button 9A has been operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more during the conditional stage transition period. In this case, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, and then the push-down operation button 9A is further operated, it may be possible to immediately shift to the next step or the conditional step. You may make it transfer to the following stage after progress of a transfer period. In addition, as a predetermined transition condition, after a lapse of a specific period (for example, X seconds (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of the conditional stage transition period for a predetermined period within the conditional stage transition period, and for Y seconds (for example, 1 It is also possible to adopt that the pressing operation button 9A is operated during the period (before the elapse of seconds). In this case, after the push-down operation button 9A is operated in the specific period, when the push-down operation button 9A is further operated, it may be possible to immediately shift to the next stage, or after the lapse of the conditional stage shift period, You may make it shift to the stage of. By doing so, in the operation-linked effect, the number of times the pressing operation button 9A is operated can be intentionally increased or the operation timing can be changed, and the effect can be diversified.

Further, the conditional stage transition period is not limited to the one described above as long as it is within a predetermined time (operation-linked effect effective time) as an executable time of the operation-linked effect, and can be set appropriately. For example, when the stage "7" is set as the conditional stage transition period, the conditional stage transition period is set to 1.5 seconds (1500 ms) capable of displaying 90 frames of images, When "8" is set as the conditional stage transition period, 2 seconds (2000 ms) capable of displaying an image for 120 frames is set as the conditional stage transition period, and the stage "11" is set as the condition. When it is set as the additional stage transition period, 4 seconds (4000 ms) capable of displaying 240 frames of images may be set as the conditional stage transition period. That is, the later the stage set as the conditional stage transition period, the longer the conditional stage transition period may be. Alternatively, the later the stage set as the conditional stage transition period, the shorter the conditional stage transition period can be set. The same applies to the specific period described above. By doing so, the timing of transitioning from the conditional stage transition period to the next stage can be changed depending on which stage is set as the conditional stage transition period, so that the production can be diversified. It will be possible.

Further, the lottery rate for determining whether or not to shift the stage is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, an operation interlocking production scenario in which the lottery rate at which stage transition “present” is determined in stages other than the conditional stage transition period is 32768/32768 may be defined. Specifically, in “scenario 1 (success)”, the stage “7” is defined as a conditional stage transition period, and the stage transition “present” in the stages “1” to “6” and “8” to “11” is “present”. Is defined as 32768/32768. By doing so, it immediately shifts to the next stage in the stages other than the conditional stage transition period, and does not shift to the next stage unless the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the conditional stage transition period. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more dramatic effect.

Further, in this case, a similar lottery rate may be defined in “scenario 6 (failure)” which is paired with “scenario 1 (success)”. However, in this case, since the "scenario 6 (failure)" will eventually result in the operation-linked effect failure, the period predetermined as the conditional stage transition period is the one in "scenario 1 (success)". Longer (for example, if the conditional stage transition period in "scenario 1 (success)" is 1.5 seconds, the conditional stage transition period in "scenario 6 (failure)" is 9 seconds), or Even if the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the conditional stage transition period, the process is not shifted to the next stage (for example, the lottery rate for determining the stage transition “present” is set). 0/32768), or the probability of shifting to the next stage may be lowered (for example, the lottery rate at which the stage shift “present” is determined is set to 8192/32768). That is, the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied during the conditional stage transition period of “Scenario 6 (Success)” is more than the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied during the conditional stage transition period of “Scenario 1 (Success)”. You may make it difficult to shift to the next stage. By doing so, for example, when the conditional stage transition period occurs in stage “7”, “scenario 1 (success)” or “scenario 6 (failure)” is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario. If you move to the next stage after a certain transition condition is met, the possibility that “Scenario 1 (Success)” has been decided increases, so the jackpot expectation is high at the same time. You will be able to recognize. That is, the jackpot expectation can be changed depending on whether or not the conditional stage shift period shifts to the next stage. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Example of performance contents for operation-linked performance>
Here, an example of the effect contents of the operation-linked effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are diagrams showing an example of effect contents for each operation-linked effect scenario. In the following description, a case where “scenario 1 (success)” is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the current stage is “0”, the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage shift “present” is determined by the lottery rate of 24576/32768, the display area 4A is displayed. The character 1 is displayed at and the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 8192/32768, the character 1 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "0" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "0".

Further, when the current stage is "1", when the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "present" is determined by the lottery rate of 24576/32768, in addition to the character 1 in the display area 4A. Character 2 is displayed and the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 8192/32768, the character 2 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the stage is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "1" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "1".

When the current stage is “2”, the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage shift “present” is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 and 2 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying character 3, the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 3 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "2" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "2".

Further, when the current stage is "3", when the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "present" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 to 3 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying character 4, move to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 4 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "3" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "3".

Further, when the current stage is "4", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage shift "present" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 to 4 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 5, the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 5 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "4" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "4".

Further, when the current stage is "5", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage shift "present" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 to 5 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 6, the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 6 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "5" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "5".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the current stage is “6”, when the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift “present” is determined by the lottery rate of 14107/32768, the display is displayed. In the area 4A, the character 7 is displayed in addition to the characters 1 to 6, and the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 18661/32768, the character 7 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the stage is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "6" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "6".

Further, when the current stage is "7", it means that it is a conditional stage transition period. Therefore, when the press operation button 9A is operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, the character 1 is displayed in the display area 4A. The character 8 is displayed in addition to 7 to 7, and the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, if the push operation button 9A is operated before the lapse of the conditional stage transition period, or if the push operation button 9A is not operated even after the lapse of the conditional stage transition period, the display area 4A is displayed. Do not display character 7 and do not move to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "7". In the conditional stage transition period, the press operation button 9A is invalidated so that the effect contents of the operation-linked effect are changed.

Further, when the current stage is "8", when the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "present" is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 8 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 9, the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 9 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "8" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "8".

When the current stage is “9”, the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage shift “present” is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 9 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 10, the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 10 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "9" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "9".

Further, when the current stage is “10”, the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage shift “present” is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 10 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 11, the process moves to the next stage. On the other hand, if the push-down operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 11 is not displayed in the display area 4A, and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "10" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the push operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "10".

When the current stage is “11”, the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage shift “present” is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 11 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 12, the operation-linked effect is ended and the effect is expanded to the super reach C. On the other hand, when the push-down operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift “none” is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 12 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the shift to the next stage is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains "11" until the push operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "11". In addition, in “scenario 6 (failure)” to “scenario 10 (failure)”, when the current stage is “11”, the stage shift “present” is determined even if the push operation button 9A is operated. There is no case (see FIG. 18) so that the effect does not develop into super reach C (that is, the operation-linked effect fails).

In addition, even if the current stage is any of "0" to "11", the operation-linked effect is terminated when the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed. Therefore, when the player wants to confirm the final production stage in the operation-linked production, it is necessary to shift the stage early within the period obtained by subtracting the conditional stage transition period from the operation-linked production effective time. Become. That is, in the stages other than the conditional stage transition period, the pressing operation button 9A is repeatedly hit so that the stage transition “present” is determined earlier. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the production using the operation means.

<Rush mode mode decision table>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario determination table in the RUSH mode. The RUSH mode scenario determination table is a table that is referred to in the pressing operation button operation determination process (see FIGS. 45 and 46 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and according to various parameters such as the sub effect selection random number range. Information (scenario during the RUSH mode) for determining the order of determining the opponent characters in the "Kekko Battle Reach" effect in the RUSH mode. The specific control of the "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect using the table will be described later.

In the RUSH mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 21, as the RUSH mode scenario, scenarios 1 to 24 in which the order of determination of the opponent characters are different are defined, and a lottery value is defined for each of them. One of the scenarios is determined depending on which range the effect selection random number range belongs to.

Here, as shown in FIG. 21, it is relatively difficult to determine the character 1 as compared to the other opponent characters (for example, scenarios 1 to 12), and in making all the opponent characters victorious. The difficulty level is set high. In that sense, character 1 can also be called a special character.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 22, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process ends, the process moves to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input/output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power failure is detected. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is in the power failure detection state, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the process is performed in S13. Transfer.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, the process proceeds to S30 (see FIG. 23). If it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S16. Transfer processing.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S17 when it is determined that the power failure detection flag is present, and shifts the processing to S30 (see FIG. 23) when it is determined that the power failure detection flag is not present. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process damage check and calculates a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when determining that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S19, and when determining that the work damage check value is not a normal value, S30 (see FIG. 23). ) To the processing.

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at power recovery. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU 61 causes a display for notifying that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state. When this process ends, the process moves to S22. It should be noted that the notification display may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a power recovery command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting to the sub control circuit 70 a command for returning to the game state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S24 and returns to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 23, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs an all work area clear process. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 carries out an initial setting process of the work area when the RAM is initialized. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs an initial value random number updating process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect condition selection random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S41. In this process, the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value may be updated.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and when the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, moves the processing to S42 and sets the system timer monitoring timer value to 3 If not, the process proceeds to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 synchronizes the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70 with a waiting time timer and a special winning opening for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening that is opened when a big hit occurs. Various timers such as an open time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 through the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that a fraudulent activity has been performed, and the like. Execute the process to update the timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described later in detail, in this processing, the main CPU 61 determines a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start winning opening switch 320 and the second starting winning opening switch 330. Is extracted, the jackpot determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62 is referred to, it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (lottery for jackpot) is won, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 63. To do. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to make a lost design or a winning design based on the hit probability of the normal design (see FIG. 8) according to the detection signal from the passage gate switch 350, and makes a determination. Perform the process of storing the result. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination showing the winning symbol is stored, and in the case of the non-winning, the result of the determination showing the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the hit pattern is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, or opened four times in 1.4 seconds, or opened six times in 1.8 seconds. To do. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is designed to be opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to enter the second starting opening 33. The main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determination random number value and a normal symbol determination random number value according to the detection signal from the passage gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. Based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determination random number value, and the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 (illustrated It is also possible to determine whether to use the lost symbol or the hit symbol based on (abbreviation). When this process ends, the process moves to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends to the main RAM 63 a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45, and the result of the normal symbol control process. Perform a process of storing. Thereby, the LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display portion 51 of the LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of generating data regarding a game information signal to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol reserve number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 26) in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350 and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first The control signal for driving the special symbol hold display section 55, the second special symbol hold display section 56 and the normal symbol hold display section 52 is stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and an LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED, the first special winning opening shutter 36A, and the second big winning prize. A solenoid power supply for driving a solenoid for opening/closing the mouth shutter 37A and opening/closing the blade member 34 is supplied. When this process ends, the process moves to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 executes a winning opening-related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main processing by the main CPU 61 in S38 to S50 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main processing and execute the timer interrupt processing even when the main processing is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in response to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 24, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by 1. The system timer monitor timer is a monitor timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and sends a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 is removed from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters the system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a reach determination counter, and an effect selection counter. If the update timing of the counter value is indefinite, the hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter will lack fairness, so to ensure this, the fixed timing every 2 ms. I am trying to update at. When this process ends, the process moves to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described later in detail, in this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won. The switch input processing of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won in the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. If there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout/launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area whose bit is “1 (ON)” from the payout device 83 in association with the winning of the game ball, and the set command. Is transmitted to the payout/launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command setting is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process ends, the process moves to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs a command transmission control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process ends, the process moves to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register restoration process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, the timer interrupt process routine ends.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the timer updating process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer updating process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of executions (startups) of the timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started) reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. When this process ends, the process moves to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0". The remaining ball monitoring timer is a ball passage from the first big winning opening 36 to the first big winning opening count switch 360, and a ball passage from the second big winning opening 37 to the second big winning opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the remaining sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining spheres remaining in. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77, and if it determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is not "0". , S73. In addition, when the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0" and the round game is not in progress, when the special winning opening count switch detects a game ball, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0". In this process, when determining that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77, and when determining that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0". , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the specific area 38A is open. In this process, when determining that the specific area 38A is not open, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S77, and when determining that the specific area 38A is open, shifts the processing to S76.

In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on the control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so that the specific area 38A is closed. When this process ends, the process moves to S77. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is “0” after the second special winning opening 37 has finished the long opening (the opening state is the section of 27.948 s) and is closed. Then, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific region 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A becomes an closed state after an open state for a time slightly shorter than 29.144 s which is defined as the longest operation time by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring a discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged into the second special winning opening 37. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", it moves the process to S80, and if it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", S78. Transfer processing to. In the present embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring timer is set to a smaller value (shorter time) than the discharge monitoring timer, but it may be set to the same value or a large value (longer time).

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the timer update processing routine, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". Moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the value of the special winning opening opening counter is "10". The special winning opening opening number counter is a counter used for identifying the 4Rth opening and closing of the second special winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the special winning opening opening counter does not count the number of times the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are actually opened, and is incremented by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is not "4", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S82 and determines that the value of the special opening opening counter is "4". If so, the process proceeds to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, has a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the special winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the control status flag indicates the special winning opening opening processing. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second special winning opening prize counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter. The second special winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second special winning opening 37 detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game balls detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second special winning opening prize counter and the value of the discharge ball counter are the same. In this process, if the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is If it is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from when the game ball is detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370 until it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Equivalent to time. Therefore, in this processing, when it is determined that the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the ball clogging inside the second special winning opening 37 or the second big due to a so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning hole count switch 370 is detected.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the sheet has not been ejected normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second special winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the ejection error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update process routine ends. The ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 26, in S90, the main CPU 61 conducts fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, etc., which are not particularly shown. When this process ends, the process moves to S91. If any of the above-mentioned sensors is in a detected state, error notification may be given, and at that time, even if the special winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalid. You may do so.

In S91, the main CPU 61 conducts special symbol-related switch check processing. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the passage gate switch 350 has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. (4 pieces), and if it is determined to be the upper limit, this processing ends. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, processing for outputting a detection signal is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball-related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330 are input. When it is determined that the general winning a prize left switch 400A or the general winning a prize right switch 400B is input, the process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning a prize ball counter is performed, and the first start winning a prize switch 320 or the second When it is determined that the start winning opening switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding starting opening winning counter is performed. When this processing ends, this switch input processing routine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 27, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first starting opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second starting opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first special winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second special winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, this special symbol related switch check process routine ends.

[1st starting opening switch check processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The first starting opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 28, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320. To do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start opening prize detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start opening switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start opening is determined. When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the processing is moved to S111. When the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting opening The switch check processing routine ends.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. When it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first starting opening switch check processing routine is ended, and when it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of starting memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the random number value for hit determination of the special symbol game from the random number counter for determination of hit by a so-called special symbol lottery, and extracts the random number value for determination of the symbol from the random number counter for determining symbol, and further , A reach determination random number value is extracted from the reach determination counter, an effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection counter, and the process is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol starting storage area, there is a first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, various obtained by the game ball winning the first starting opening 32 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number value is sequentially stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S115.

In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for winning determination and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and whether or not a winning lottery result has been won. Like The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect that continues over a plurality of games when it is determined in the process of S115 that the winning effect is achieved. As a result, a so-called “pre-reading effect” such as performing an effect based on the starting memory before the variation execution becomes possible. When this process ends, the first starting opening switch check process routine ends.

[Second starting opening switch check processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The second starting opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 29, in S120, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330. To do. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second starting opening is determined. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is moved to S121. If the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting port The switch check processing routine ends.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. When it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second starting opening switch check processing routine is ended, and when it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of starting memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the special symbol game from the random number counter for determination of hit by a so-called special symbol lottery, and extracts a random number value for determination of a symbol from the random number counter for determination of a symbol, and further. , A reach determination random number value is extracted from the reach determination counter, an effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection counter, and the process is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol starting storage area, there is a second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, various obtained by the game ball winning the second starting opening 33 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number value of is sequentially stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the second starting opening switch check process routine ends.

[First prize winning switch check processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special winning opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The first special winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 30, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first special winning opening count switch 360. Perform processing to In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 36 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S131, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 36. When it is determined that it is not performed, this first special winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first special winning opening prize counter. The first big winning award winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process ends, the process moves to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub controlling circuit 70, so that the sub controlling circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first special winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, it is possible to perform addition display of the total payout amount (the number of payout prize balls) during the RUSH mode. When this process ends, the first special winning opening switch check process routine ends.

[2nd prize winning switch check processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a second special winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second special winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 31, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second special winning opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second special winning opening count switch 370. Perform processing to In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball into the second special winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S141, and detects the winning of the game ball into the second special winning opening 37. If it is determined that it is not performed, the process proceeds to S143.

In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second special winning opening prize counter. The second special winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process ends, the process moves to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 sets the second special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub controlling circuit 70, so that the sub controlling circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second special winning opening 37. Become aware. This also enables, for example, addition display of the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) during the RUSH mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected, based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S144, and determines that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process proceeds to S152.

In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening counter is "4". The special winning opening opening number counter is as described above. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is not "4", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S152 and determines that the value of the special opening opening counter is "4". If so, the process proceeds to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, has a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the special winning opening opening process (04H), the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S149, and the control state flag is the value indicating the special winning opening opening process (04H). If it is determined not to be), the process proceeds to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag, which will be described later, has a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening restart pre-release waiting time management process or a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. I do. When determining that the control state flag is “05H” or “06H”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S148, and when determining that the control state flag is neither “05H” nor “06H”. Moves the process to S152.

In S148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0". The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S149 and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”. Then, the process proceeds to S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than “0”, it is determined that an illegal prize has been generated, and an error command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may do so.

In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”. The specific area passage flag is an internal flag which is set to "01H" when the specific area switch 380A detects a V winning of a game ball. In this processing, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S152, and if it is determined that the value of the specific area passage flag is not “01H”. , S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is determined after the jackpot gaming state ends. When this process ends, the process moves to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passing command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passing command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. When this process ends, the process moves to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific region 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S153, and determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific region 38B is not detected. In that case, the process proceeds to S154.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the second special winning opening prize counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370, and the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only in the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, if the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates the second special winning opening switch check processing routine, and the second special winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command is as described above. When this process ends, the process moves to S156.

In S156, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second special winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the ejection error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the second special winning opening switch check process routine ends. The ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following steps. Note that, in FIG. 32, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate control status flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control status flag in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S161.

In S161 to S168 described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes in S161 to S168. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61, the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set as the control state flag. After setting, the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 540 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S163 after the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed. When it is a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the processing of S164 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the first big prize read from the main ROM 62. The data for opening the mouth shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A and the data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 23, the main CPU 61 stores the data and the displacement member 39 for opening the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63. The data for opening is read, and the control signals based on these data are supplied to the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening reopening, and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval pattern a to c) has elapsed, The special winning opening opening counter is stored and updated so as to be incremented by "1". The main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996s of the opening/closing pattern A) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the processing of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening/closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is "9" or more, the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions "the special winning opening opening timer is "0") is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37 when either condition is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the maximum opening opening maximum value (that is, the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the case of the final round, while a value (05H) indicating the waiting time before the special winning opening reopening in the case of not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating that the control state flag indicates the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S168.

In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game ending process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the process at the end of the special symbol game (for example, 1 indicating the end of one game from the external terminal board 80) A process for outputting a game end signal and a big hit signal indicating that the big hit game is in progress) is executed, and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol control process routine ends.

As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), (02H), (07H) when the result of the hit determination is lost in the case of not being in the big hit game state. As a result, the processing of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 32 is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, in the case where the jackpot is not in the big hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to (00H), (01H), and (02H) in this order when the hit determination result is a big hit, so that S161 shown in FIG. , S162, S163 are executed at a predetermined timing to start the jackpot gaming state. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag in the order of (03H), (04H), (05H), and thereby predetermined processing of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. It will be executed at the timing of, and the jackpot gaming state will be executed. In addition, when the termination condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied, by setting in sequence (04H), (06H), (07H), the processing of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 32 is executed at a predetermined timing. Then, the big hit game state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol storage check process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 33, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When determining that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S171. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory is stored. In this process, the main CPU 61, when it is determined that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage If the data is not stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, it shifts the processing to S173.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs demo display processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the starting memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol starting storage region or the second special symbol starting storage region in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is in a state of "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If maintained, the demo display permission value is set to a value that permits execution of the demo display. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command thus stored is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demo display command. As a result, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence or absence of data in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), and the starting storage corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, that is, if it is determined that the data is not stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the process proceeds to S174. Starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second special symbol starting memory region (0) to the second special symbol starting memory region (4), The processing moves to S175.

In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S176.

In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, the main CPU 61, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, each of the data of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first The special symbol starting storage area (0) shifts (stores) from the first special symbol starting storage area (3) to the process, and the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol starting storage area (1) from each of the data in the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the process to shift (store) from the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3) To do. When this process ends, the process moves to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 selects one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) that are a big hit is different depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates the probability variation game state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability variation game state with a small number is referred to. In this way, if the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, that is, if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state as the special gaming state that is easy to shift to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition will be higher than the non-probability variation game state as the non-special game state in which it is more difficult to transition to the specific game state than the probability variation game state as the special game state.

In the present embodiment, the special game state may be a probability variation/time saving game state (for example, 1 to 20 times in RUSH mode) or a probability variation/non-time saving game state (for example, special mode). The special game state may be an uncertain variation/non-time saving game state (for example, normal mode), or an uncertain variation/time saving game state (for example, 21 to 100 times in RUSH mode).

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and for the hit determination of the special symbol starting storage area previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability of winning in the first starting opening 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting opening 33. The jackpot probability of winning in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting port 33.

Thus, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process ends, the process moves to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and a process of determining a lose symbol in the case of a loss. The details of S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S180.

In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a variation pattern determination table based on the game state (mode), the result of the big hit determination (winning), and the reach determination random number value. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect selection random number value and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 determines the variable display mode of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. It should be noted that various parameters used in determining the variation pattern are acquired when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33 is detected (S113 of FIG. 28 or S123 of FIG. 29). It is also possible to configure so that the variation pattern is determined when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33 is detected.

The data indicating the variation pattern thus stored is supplied to the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 will be variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the process moves to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for this variation display. When this process ends, the process moves to S182.

Then, in S182, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 34, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S198.

In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S192 when the fluctuation state number is a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the main CPU 61, if the variation state number is not a value (01H) indicating that it is a variation of the first special symbol, that is, the variation state number is a value (02H) indicating that it is a variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S194.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the first special symbol, based on the random number for winning symbol determination. In this process, the main CPU 61, based on the winning symbol determination random number and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol allocation of FIG. 8) A process of determining a symbol corresponding to any one of the big hits 1 to 6 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the big hit symbol of the determined first special symbol and the command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display portion 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S196.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61, based on the hit symbol determination random number and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) A process of determining a symbol corresponding to a big hit 6 to 9) is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the jackpot pattern of the determined second special symbol and the command set of the jackpot symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display portion 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this processing, the main CPU 61, the special winning opening opening number related data regarding the opening number of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37, that is, the jackpot 1-6 by the first special symbol, or the second special symbol The data corresponding to the big hits 6 to 9 is set in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, this special symbol determination process routine ends.

On the other hand, in S198, when the main CPU 61 determines in S190 that it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, it performs a data set of a loss symbol and a command set of a loss symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbols, and stops and displays them in a manner based on the data of the lost symbols of the special symbols. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command for a lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the discontinuation display mode. When this process ends, this special symbol determination process routine ends.

[Special symbol variable time management processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 35, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When determining that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

In S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. When it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

In S212, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the post-determination wait time in the area of the main RAM 63 that functions as a wait time timer. When this process ends, the special symbol variation time management process routine ends.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 36, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S221. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S224.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the uncertain variation/non-time saving game state in the game state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S234.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The hour/hour counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the hour/hour gaming state. When the value of the hour/hour counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the hour/hour counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the time saving counter is "0". When the value of the hour/hour counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the hour/hour counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. When this process ends, the process moves to S232.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation number) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S229.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S230.

In S230, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S231. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability variation end command indicating the end of the probability variation gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability variation end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability variation game state. Become. When this process ends, the process moves to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 sets the value (01H) indicating the non-probability variation/time saving game state in the game state flag when the probability variation/time saving game state (03H) ends, and the probability variation/non time saving game. In the state (02H), when the probability variation game state ends, a value (00H) indicating the non-probability variation/non-time saving game state is set in the game state flag, and in the non-probability variation/time saving game state (01H), the time saving game state When is finished, a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a non-probable variation/non-time saving game state in the game state flag is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the ending process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol display time management process routine ends.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S235. In the present embodiment, when the big hit symbols are the first special symbol “big hit 1” and the second special symbol “big hit 6”, 9996 ms is set as the hit start interval time, and other big hit symbols If it is, when the hit start from the non-time saving game state, 9996 ms is set as the hit start interval time, and if the hit start is from the time saving game state, 3996 ms is set as the hit start interval time. R.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big hit game state. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state by the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process ends, the process moves to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening opening counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol display time management process routine ends.

[Hit start interval management processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S241. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and then shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening opening counter, and moves the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a special winning opening opening/closing pattern corresponding to the type of big hit symbol, in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 11, which corresponds to the big hit symbol determined in S244. When this process ends, the process moves to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process to a control state flag in a predetermined area in the main RAM 63 that functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S247.

In S247, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S248.

In S248, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S249.

In S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 27.996 s if the time corresponding to the value of the special winning opening opening counter (the number of rounds), for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is "big hit 1". When this process ends, the process moves to S250.

In S250, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way is to drive the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends.

[Wait time management process before reopening the special winning opening]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time management process before re-opening of the special winning opening is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating a waiting time before pre-reopening special winning opening management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag has the value (05H) indicating the waiting time before opening special winning opening management process (05H), the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the pre-winning prize hole pre-opening waiting time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning hole pre-reopening waiting time management process routine.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time is "0". When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the before-special winning opening re-waiting time management processing routine.

In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening opening display command. When this process ends, the process moves to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process in a predetermined region functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S265.

In S265, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S266.

In S266, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S267.

In S267, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S268.

In S268, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process routine ends.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening opening process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 39, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening opening processing routine.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening prize counter is "8" or more. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is “8” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S272. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274 when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is not “8” or more.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the special winning opening opening/closing processing according to the opening/closing pattern for each set round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the processing to S273.

In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time is "0". When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening opening processing routine.

In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this way is for closing the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process ends, the process moves to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the remaining ball monitoring timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. When this process ends, the process moves to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed special winning opening is the second special winning opening 37. When determining that the closed special winning opening is the second special winning opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S277. On the other hand, when determining that the closed special winning opening is not the second special winning opening 37, that is, the first special winning opening 36, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S278.

In S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. When this process ends, the process moves to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening number (round number). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening opening number (round number) to determine the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times of opening the special winning opening. Here, the upper limit value of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is 12 times (12R). When determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is not less than the upper limit of the winning opening opening count, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S282. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is not equal to or larger than the upper limit of the special opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S279.

In S279, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time in the main RAM 63 based on the hit pattern and the number of rounds. That is, the time corresponding to any of the interval patterns a to c is set based on the hit pattern and the current number of rounds (see FIG. 11). The inter-round interval display time may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns a to c. When this process ends, the process moves to S280.

In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S281.

In S281, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a display command between rounds in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The display command between rounds is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the special winning opening opening process routine ends.

On the other hand, in S282, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S283. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the hit end from the non-time saving game state, the big hit symbol is "big hit 1" to "big hit 4" of the first special symbol and "big hit 6" of the second special symbol. -If "big hit 9", 9996 ms is set as the end-of-hit interval display time, and if the big hit symbol is "big hit 5"-"big hit 7" of the first special symbol, 6000 ms is set as the end-of-interval display time When the hit end from the non-time saving game state, 3996 ms is set as the hit end interval display time for any big hit symbol.

In S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area in the main RAM 63 that functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S284.

In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state. When this process ends, the special winning opening opening process routine ends.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process is executed in the following steps.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S298.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S298.

In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is “01H”. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S295.

In S294, the main CPU 61 sets the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "02H", the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63 to "20", and the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 to "00H". Perform processing to In addition, "02H" of the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. When this process ends, the process moves to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61, at the end of the hit patterns 5 to 7, that is, the process of determining whether or not it is the end of the big hit game state based on the "big hit 5" to "big hit 7" of the first special symbol. To do. If it is determined that the hit patterns 5 to 7 are finished, the process is moved to S296. When it is determined that the hit patterns 5 to 7 have not been completed, the process proceeds to S297.

In S296, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of determining whether or not it is a hit in the normal game state, that is, the end of the big hit game state transitioned from the uncertain variation/non-time saving game state. When it is determined that the hit is in the normal gaming state, the processing is moved to S298. If it is determined that the hit is not in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting "01H" in the game state flag of the main RAM 63 and setting "100" in the value of the hour/hour counter of the main RAM 63. The game state flag "01H" indicates a time saving game state. Further, when "02H" (00000010B) is set as the gaming state flag and "01H" (00000001B) is set as the gaming state flag, the gaming state flag is "03H" which indicates the probability variation/time saving gaming state. (00000011B). When this process ends, the process moves to S298.

In S298, the main CPU 61 sets the game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of the finished gaming state in addition to the information indicating the gaming state to be controlled after the jackpot gaming state is finished and the remaining number of times as a shortened number of times, and the main control circuit 60. By being supplied from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the game state and the like after the end of the big hit.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game ending process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 41, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S301. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game ending process routine.

In S301, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end time processing according to the opening/closing pattern for each set round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the processing to S302. In this special symbol game end process, the main CPU 61 executes a process for outputting a 1 game end signal or a big hit signal from the external terminal board 80 to the hall computer 100.

In S302, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processing such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main processing is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 42, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initialization in response to power-on. When this process ends, the process moves to S311.

In S311, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number value (random number counter value for effect determination, random number counter value for stop symbol determination, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S312.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs a display control process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) stores various image data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the image data ROM, superimposed on each other, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S314.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs a voice control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process ends, the process moves to S315.

In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling the light emission (lighting/blinking) of the lamp/LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process ends, the process moves to S316.

In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process ends, the process moves to S311 and the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated thereafter.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process and the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. The command reception interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 43, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 43, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. 47 and 48. When this process ends, the process moves to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S320 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt process routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 44, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding/subtracting) the value of the timer set for effect control. When this process ends, the process moves to S332.

In step S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting whether or not the push-down operation button 9A and the jog dial 9B are operated. When this process ends, the process moves to S333. The pressing operation button operation determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt process routine ends.

[Press operation button operation determination process]
45 and 46 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 45, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked effect is being performed. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked continuous output based on the determination of “04H”, “08H”, or “12H” as the variation pattern is being executed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect is being performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S341. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect is not being performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S359 (see FIG. 46).

In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the conditional stage transition period. As described above, in the conditional stage transition period, even if the pressing operation button 9A is pressed during the conditional stage transition period, the process does not move to the next stage, but the conditional stage transition period elapses. This is a period provided so that when the pressing operation button 9A is subsequently pressed, the step is always shifted to the next step (see FIGS. 18 to 20). In this processing, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is during the conditional stage shift period, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S342. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not during the conditional stage shift period, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S344.

In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed. Here, the operation-linked effect effective time is a predetermined time as the time during which the operation-linked effect can be performed within the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern, and can be set to, for example, “28000 ms”. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S343.

In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for invalidating the press operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for invalidating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A. In this process, the detection by the push operation button SW90A may be invalidated, or the work RAM 73 may not be stored with the number of times the push operation button is operated. Further, in this process, instead of invalidating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A, a process of setting the lottery rate for determining the stage transition “present” as 0/32768 may be performed. That is, the lottery rate may be set such that the stage shift “present” is not determined when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the conditional stage transition period has ended. That is, the sub CPU 71 is the stage in which the current stage is set as the conditional stage transition period in the determined operation-linked effect scenario, and the period (for example, 1.5 seconds) set as the conditional stage transition period. ) Is performed, a process for determining whether or not has passed. In this processing, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period has ended, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S345. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period has not ended, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S350. If the sub CPU 71 determines in this process that the conditional stage transition period has ended, the sub CPU 71 may perform the processes of S348 and S349 without performing the process of S347 described below. That is, the sub CPU 71 may be configured to always shift to the next stage if there is a next stage when the conditional stage shift period ends.

In S345, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for validating the push operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for validating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A. In this process, instead of validating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A, a process of setting the lottery rate at which the stage transition “present” is determined as 32768/32768 may be performed. That is, the lottery rate may be set such that the stage transition “present” is always determined when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed. When this process ends, the process moves to S346. It should be noted that when the conditional stage transition period ends, after the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A is once validated in this process, it is determined again in the process of S344 that the conditional stage transition period has ended. In this case, the process may be moved to S346 without performing this process again.

In S346, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S347.

In S347, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button has been operated. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been pressed. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the pressing operation button is operated, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S348. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the push operation button has not been operated, the sub CPU 71 ends the push operation button operation determination processing routine. In this process, the sub CPU 71 may shift the process to S355 if it is determined that the pressing operation button is not operated. That is, if the pressing operation button 9A is not operated after the lapse of the conditional stage transition period, the operation-linked effect may be ended.

In S348, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether there is a next stage. In this embodiment, since the stage in the operation-linked effect is set to 0 to 11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current stage is the 11th stage in this process. Is performed. If the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S349. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S376 (see FIG. 46).

In S349, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of shifting the stage of the operation-linked effect to the next stage. For example, when “scenario 1 (success)” is determined as the operation-linked production scenario and it is the seventh stage as the conditional stage transition period, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the eighth stage of the operation-linked production. Perform processing to When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S351.

In S351, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button has been operated. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been pressed. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the pressing operation button is operated, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S352. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the push operation button has not been operated, the sub CPU 71 ends the push operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S352, the sub CPU 71 refers to the operation-linked effect stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18 and performs a process of determining whether or not to transition from the current stage to the next stage. When this process ends, the process moves to S353.

In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determination result in the process of S352 indicates that there is a stage transition (that is, a transition to the next stage). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a stage shift (that is, the stage shift “present” is determined), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S354. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no stage shift (that is, the stage shift “absent” is determined), the sub CPU 71 ends the push operation button operation determination process routine.

In S354, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a next stage. As described above, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the current stage is the 11th stage in this process. When the sub CPU 71 determines that there is the next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S355. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S376 (see FIG. 46).

In S355, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of shifting the stage of the operation-linked effect to the next stage. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S356, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the variation pattern is successful operation-linked effect. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the variation pattern is “08H” or “12H” (see FIG. 12). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern is the success of the operation-linked effect, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S357. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern is not the success of the operation-linked effect, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S358.

In S357, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "operation-linked effect failure→reverse rotation" effect data and shifting to super reach C. Even if the variation pattern is the success of the operation-linked production, the operation data is “operation-linked production failure→reverse rotation”. If the operation-linked production effective time elapses before the final production stage, the operation data is linked. Although it fails as an effect, it is effect data for performing an effect indicating that the variation reaches the super reach C. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S358, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the "operation linked effect failure" effect data. The “operation-linked production failure” production data is a production for performing a production that indicates that the operation-linked production will fail when the variation pattern is the operation-linked production failure and the operation-linked production effective time has elapsed. The data. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

As shown in FIG. 46, in S359, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to shift to the RUSH mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the time saving game state is started after the end of the big hit game state. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is time to shift to the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S360. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not the time of transition to the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S369.

In S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of displaying a takeover selection operation screen of the won character history. Details of this takeover selection operation screen will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S361. In addition, after displaying the takeover selection operation screen once in this process, if it is determined again in the process of S359 that it is the transition to the RUSH mode, the process is moved to S361 without performing this process again. You may

In S361, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the player has performed a takeover selection operation. For example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the succession of the winning character has been selected by the rotation operation of the jog dial 9B and the fact has been determined by the depressing operation of the depressing operation button 9A. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation is performed, the process is transferred to S366. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no takeover selection operation, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S362.

In S362, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the takeover selection operation valid time has elapsed. Here, the takeover selection operation valid time is a time predetermined as a time for which the takeover selection operation can be performed, and can be set to, for example, “10000 ms”. It should be noted that the takeover selection operation may be enabled during the hit end interval display time. In this case, any time equal to or shorter than the hit end interval display time may be set as the takeover selection operation valid time. In this processing, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation valid time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S363. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation valid time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 ends the push operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing the winning character history. Here, in the present embodiment, in the RUSH mode, in the case where the change pattern “per captain battle reach per hit” or “special character battle reach per hit” is determined and the jackpot game state is entered, the battle that appears in the battle reach. The character is stored in the work RAM 73 as the history of characters that have been won. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (initializing) this winning character history to 0 based on the fact that the player has not performed a takeover selection operation. As a result, for example, the player can newly accumulate his or her won character history in the RUSH mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S364.

In S364, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for initializing the acquired music history. Here, in the present embodiment, when the battle character that appeared in the above-mentioned battle reach is stored in the work RAM 73 as the history of the won character, the player can newly select the music corresponding to the battle character. The music that can be selected is stored in the work RAM 73 as the acquired music history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (initializing) the acquired music history to 0 based on the fact that the player has not performed a takeover selection operation. Thereby, for example, the player can newly accumulate his own acquired music history in the RUSH mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S365.

In step S365, the sub CPU 71 refers to the RUSH mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 21, and performs a process of determining a scenario in RUSH mode. That is, in the present embodiment, if the winning character history (acquired song history) is not inherited without performing the inheritance selection operation, the scenario in the RUSH mode (competition character determination order) is not inherited in conjunction with it. The scenario in the RUSH mode (competition character determination order) is newly determined. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the winning character history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning (taking over) the winning character history based on the player performing the takeover selection operation. Thereby, for example, the player can carry out the game by succeeding the winning character history of his own player or another player accumulated in the previous RUSH mode also in the current RUSH mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S367.

In S367, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the acquired music history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning (taking over) the acquired music history based on the takeover selection operation performed by the player. As a result, for example, the player can play the acquired music history of the player or another player accumulated in the previous RUSH mode in the current RUSH mode as well. When this process ends, the process moves to S368.

In S368, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the previous RUSH mode scenario. That is, in the present embodiment, when the takeover selection operation is performed and the won character history (acquired song history) is taken over, the scenario in the RUSH mode (matching character determination order) is taken over in association with it. Is composed of. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S369, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a hit start time in the RUSH mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to start the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, and the result of the big hit determination result in the time saving game state. In this processing, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is the start time of the hit in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S370. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not the time to start the hit in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S377.

In S370, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquired song. That is, the sub CPU 71 refers to the acquired music history and performs a process of determining whether a music other than the default music (a music defined as a default) can be selected. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is an acquired song, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S371. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no acquired song, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S374.

In S371, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of displaying the music selection operation screen of the acquired music. Details of the music selection operation screen will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S372. After the music selection operation screen is displayed once in this process, if it is determined again in S370 that there is an acquired music, the process proceeds to S372 without performing this process again. Good.

In S372, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music selection operation has been performed by the player. For example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music piece is selected by the rotation operation of the jog dial 9B and the music piece is determined by the pressing operation of the press operation button 9A. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a music selection operation, the process is moved to S375. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation has not been performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S373.

In S373, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the music selection operation valid time has elapsed. Here, the music selection operation valid time is a predetermined time as the time when the music selection operation can be performed, and can be set to “10000 ms”, for example. Note that the music selection operation may be enabled during the hit start interval time. In this case, any time less than the hit start interval time may be set as the music selection operation valid time. In this processing, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation valid time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S374. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation valid time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 ends the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S374, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a default music piece. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S375, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the selected music piece. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S376, the sub CPU 71 sets the "operation-linked effect success" effect data, and performs processing to shift to the super reach C. The "operation-linked effect success" effect data indicates that the variation pattern is the operation-related effect success, the last stage (for example, the 11th stage) is a stage other than the conditional stage transition period, and the pressing operation button 9A is When it is operated and it is determined that there is a stage transition, or when the final stage (for example, the 11th stage) is the conditional stage transition period and the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the lapse of the conditional stage transition period, It is the effect data for performing the effect indicating that the operation-linked effect is successful and that the change reaches the super reach C. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S377, the sub CPU 71 executes the other press operation button operation determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is linked to the pressing operation when, for example, a process corresponding to a login/logout operation for authenticating the player or an effect linked to the pressing operation to another pressing operation button is performed. Then, a process for changing the effect contents is performed. When this process is finished, the push operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 47, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command is received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs the process according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S392.

In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S393. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S394.

In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the received variation pattern designation command. When determining the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

As described above, the effect pattern may be determined based on the received variation pattern designating command, or may be determined based on the received start winning command. Further, each information included in these commands may be comprehensively performed.

In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designating command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designating command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S395. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designating command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S396.

In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration pattern is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative patterns (numbers) are a predetermined number (for example, three (3 digits )) are arranged with the same decorative pattern (number) (in the case of a specific display mode), it is decided to shift to the big hit game state. Further, the decorative pattern corresponding to the loss is a variegated pattern other than these, but among them, a specific number (for example, two) is stopped and displayed with the same decorative pattern (number) (becomes a reach), and the rest (for example, 1). One that is stopped and displayed with different decorative patterns (numbers) is called reach lose eye. However, even in the case of a broken line, even when a specific broken line suggesting a specific meaning (for example, “753” which means seventy-three, etc.) is stopped and displayed, it may be possible to shift to the big hit game state. ..

In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S397. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S398.

In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S391. When determining that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S399. On the other hand, when determining that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S401.

In S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the content of the effect performed in the big hit game state, based on the kind of big hit and the effect mode included in the hit start display command received from the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S400.

In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start process. This hit start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the special winning opening winning command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes prize ball counter addition processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71, depending on the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37), in the jackpot gaming state (or in the RUSH mode, In addition to counting the number of prize balls in all the big hit game states (shifted to the RUSH mode), a process of displaying the counted number of prize balls is performed. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the specific area passing command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes a V winning process. This V winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S391. When determining that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S407.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round effect process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting effect data according to the inter-round interval display time, for example. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening open display command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S408. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the special winning opening open display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S409 (see FIG. 48).

In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes an in-round effect process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for displaying the remaining number of possible winnings in the round and the special winning opening opening time. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

As shown in FIG. 48, in S409, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S411.

In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 determines the content of the effect performed at the end of the big hit game state, based on the kind of big hit included in the hit end display command received from the main CPU 61. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S413.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode changing processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71, if the received game state command is a command indicating a certainty variation/time saving game state, sets the value of the effect mode flag to "03H", and is a command indicating the non-certainty variation/time saving game state. If there is, the value of the effect mode flag is set to "01H", and the RUSH mode is set as the effect mode. Further, if the received game state command is a command indicating the probability variation/non-time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the effect mode flag to "02H" and sets the special mode as the effect mode. If the received game state command is a command indicating an uncertain change/non-time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the effect mode flag to "00H" and sets the normal mode as the effect mode. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the time saving end command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the time saving end command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S415.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes a time saving mode end process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 updates the value of the effect mode flag from "01H" to "00H", and updates the effect mode from the RUSH mode to the normal mode. In addition, for example, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that facilitates selection of an effect pattern having a relatively high degree of expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the time saving mode. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the probability variation end command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the probability variation end command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S417.

In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes ST mode end processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 updates the value of the effect mode flag from "02H" to "00H", and updates the effect mode from the special mode to the normal mode. When the value of the effect mode flag is updated from "03H" to "01H", the effect mode is not updated. In addition, for example, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that facilitates selection of an effect pattern having a relatively high degree of expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the special mode. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the discharge error command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S419.

In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for notifying the occurrence of an error in the second special winning opening 37. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S419, the sub CPU 71 executes other processes corresponding to the received command. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

[Production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an effect pattern as effect contents, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 49, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the value of the effect mode flag is “01H” or “03H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the production mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode of "00H", a value corresponding to the RUSH mode of the uncertain variation/time saving game state of "01H", and a value corresponding to the special mode of "02H". , The value corresponding to the RUSH mode as the probability variation/time saving game state becomes "03H". It is possible to change the background image and the effect contents according to the value of the effect mode flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect mode is the RUSH mode. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is “01H” or “03H”, the process proceeds to S431. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “01H” or “03H”, the process proceeds to S433.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes processing in the RUSH mode. The process in the RUSH mode will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S432.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 executes the item effect process during the RUSH mode. This item effect process in the RUSH mode will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S436.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect mode is the special mode. If it is determined that the effect mode flag value is “02H”, the process proceeds to S434. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, the process proceeds to S435.

In S434, the sub CPU 71 executes processing during the special mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a special effect medium sub effect content determination table (not shown), and outputs a result of the big hit determination (winning), a variation pattern designation command type, and a sub effect selection random number range (lottery value). And the like are used to determine the effect pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to S436. In this special mode process, the same process as the below-described normal mode process may be performed.

In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes processing in the normal mode. This normal mode process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S436.

In S436, the sub CPU 71 executes the hold display mode change effect process. The pending display mode change effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S437.

In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting the effect data according to the type of the determined effect pattern. When this process ends, the effect pattern determination process routine ends.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect when the variation pattern designation command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the winning effect determination process of S115 of the first starting port switch check process shown in FIG. 28 or S125 of the second starting port switch check process shown in FIG. 29, the main CPU 61 performs “prefetching effect”. When is determined, the hold display mode change effect may be executed. That is, the main CPU 61 side may control whether or not the hold display mode change effect is executed. In this case, the variation pattern designation command or the start winning command may include information regarding whether or not the "prefetch effect" by the main CPU 61 is allowed, or the sub CPU 71 receives the variation pattern designation command or the starting winning command. It is also possible to hold the information regarding the availability of the “pre-reading effect” included in, and refer to the held information to determine the effect contents of the hold display mode change effect.

Further, it is assumed that the main CPU 61 side determines the effect contents of the hold display mode change effect (for example, the prefetch hold change pattern shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 and the variation hold change pattern shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). Good. In this case, a variation pattern is set for each effect content of the hold display mode change effect, and the sub CPU 71 causes the hold display mode change effect based on the content of the change pattern designation command or the start winning command corresponding to the determined change pattern. Alternatively, when a specific variation pattern is selected, the effect contents of the hold display mode change effect are separately determined, and the variation pattern designation command including the information of the effect effect thus determined, or the start prize. The sub CPU 71 may perform the suspended display mode change effect by transmitting the command. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect, and determines the effect contents of the hold display mode change effect. Mode in which the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect, and the sub CPU 71 determines whether to execute the hold display mode change effect and the hold display mode. Any aspect of determining the effect content of the change effect is included.

In addition, regardless of whether the determination subject is the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, whether to execute the pending display mode change effect, and the effect contents of the pending display mode change effect when executing the pending display mode change effect. And may be determined by different lottery, and may be simultaneously determined by collective lottery. That is, whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect and the effect contents of the hold display mode change effect when executing the hold display mode change effect may be determined by a plurality of processes. It may be decided to decide.

[Processing during RUSH mode]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the RUSH mode in-process executed by the sub CPU 71. The process in the RUSH mode is a process for determining the effect contents in the RUSH mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 50, in S440, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of (adding) updating the value of the RUSH mode management counter. The RUSH mode management counter is a counter for counting the number of games in the RUSH mode, that is, the time saving game state, and in this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of incrementing the RUSH mode management counter by one change. .. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 88 or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a transformation effect section in the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 88 or more, the process proceeds to S442. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is not 88 or more (that is, the battle effect section of the RUSH mode), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S443.

In S442, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to the variation pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for RUSH mode (not shown), the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub-effect selection random number range (lottery value). And the like are used to determine the effect pattern. When this process ends, the RUSH mode in-process routine ends.

In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether "14H" or "17H" is determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is one that produces a "kakekko battle reach" effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that “14H” or “17H” is determined as the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S444. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that “14H” or “17H” is not determined as the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S451.

In S444, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all the battle characters have been won. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the history of winning all the fighting characters of the characters 1 to 12 is stored as the winning character history. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that all the fighting characters have been won, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S445. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that all the battle characters have not been won, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S446.

In S445, the sub CPU 71 determines a battle character by lottery, and sets the effect data according to the determined battle character and the variation pattern. In this processing, for example, when the battle pattern determined by lottery is the character 1, and the variation pattern is "14H", the character 1 and the main character race and the main character is defeated. Set the production data corresponding to "Battle Reach Loss", and if the fluctuation pattern is "17H", set the production data corresponding to "Kekko Battle Reach" where the main character and the main character race and the main character wins. Perform processing. When this process ends, the RUSH mode in-process routine ends.

In the process of S444, the sub CPU 71 determines that all the opponent characters have been won, and if the variation pattern is “17H”, the final stage production (ending) of the series of stories (ending) (Effect) is set, and in the hit effect pattern determination process (see S399 of FIG. 47), effect data for effecting ending is set so that all the opponent characters are set. May be given the privilege of having been won. In addition, when the effect at the time of introducing the ending effect and the ending effect are performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the winning character history is cleared to 0 again (initialization), and the winning character history is newly added. You may enable it to accumulate. However, in this case, the acquired music history is not cleared (initialized) to 0, and all the music may be left selectable. When the sub CPU 71 determines in the process of S444 that all the opponent characters have been won, the sub CPU 71 performs the process of S445 as it is, and in the hit effect pattern determination process (see S399 of FIG. 47), When the effect data for performing the ending effect is set and the ending effect is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) (that is, when the jackpot gaming state is further extended in the RUSH mode), the winning character is again won. The history may be cleared (initialized) to zero.

In S446, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to select an opponent character according to the determination order of the determined scenario. In this processing, for example, the sub CPU 71 determines to select an opponent character according to the determination order of the scenario determined with the probability of 80/100, regardless of the determination order of the scenario determined with the probability of 20/100. It is decided to select one opponent character by lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S447.

In S447, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an opponent character by a determination order of the determined scenario or a lottery according to the determination result of S446. In this process, for example, when the scenario 1 is determined as the scenario in the RUSH mode, when the sub CPU 71 determines to select the opponent character according to the determination order of the determined scenario, If the character 2 has not been won, the character 2 whose opponent character determination order is "1" is determined as the opponent character. On the other hand, if it is decided by lottery to select one opponent character regardless of the determined order of the determined scenarios, one opponent character is selected from the characters 1 to 12 by lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S448.

In S448, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether "14H" has been determined as the variation pattern and a winning character has been determined as the opponent character. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that “14H” is determined as the variation pattern and the winning character is determined as the opponent character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S449. On the other hand, if it is determined that “14H” has not been determined as the variation pattern or that the winning character has not been determined as the opponent character, the process proceeds to S450.

In S449, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for changing the battle character according to the battle character determination order of the determined scenario in the RUSH mode. In the present embodiment, in the "Kekko Battle Reach" effect, when a winning character appears as an opponent character, in principle, it is determined that the result of the big hit determination is a win. Therefore, if the result of the big hit determination is not a win and a character who has won is determined as an opponent character, the sub CPU 71 changes the opponent character to another character that has not been won in this process. ing. Specifically, for example, when scenario 1 is determined as the scenario in the RUSH mode, and the battle character determined in S447 has already won, the battle character determined in S447 is the character 2 If so, the battle character is changed to the character 11 whose battle character determination order is “2”. When this process ends, the process moves to S450.

When changing the battle character in the processing of S449, the sub CPU 71 has not won the battle character among the characters having a lower battle character determination order (higher ranking) in the determined RUSH mode scenario. The character is changed as the opponent character (that is, the opponent character determination order "1" is used as the starting point, and the characters that have not been won are sequentially searched according to the opponent character determination order in the scenario in the RUSH mode determined from that point. ,, I'm trying to change the battle character according to the search results), but is not limited to this. For example, the battle character determination order corresponding to the character determined as the battle character before the change may be used as a starting point, and a character that has not been won may be sequentially searched from there to change the battle character. Further, for example, without considering the order in which the fighting characters are determined, the search order is set in advance in the characters 1 to 12, and the characters that have not been won are sequentially searched according to this search order to change the fighting characters Good. In this case, for example, the search order may be set such that "character 12" is the starting point and "character 1" is the ending point. It is also possible to sequentially search for a character that has not been won from any other starting point and change the opponent character.

In S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined battle character and the variation pattern. When this process ends, the RUSH mode in-process routine ends.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to the variation pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for RUSH mode (not shown), the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub-effect selection random number range (lottery value). And the like are used to determine the effect pattern. When this process ends, the RUSH mode in-process routine ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), when it is determined to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), a specific effect display (for example, “ When the "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect is performed, the appearing character (for example, the opponent character) in the specific effect display is stored as the won character, and the song corresponding to the won character is the acquired song. Is newly configured to be selectable. Further, in the specific effect state, when the advantageous state is not determined to be given, when the specific effect display is performed, the appearance character stored as the won character is not determined. ing. That is, in the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed and the appearance character stored as the winning character appears, the advantageous state is determined to be given.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the number of selectable songs increases, it is possible to give an added value of changing the jackpot expectation degree when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state. It is possible to improve.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the determination order of the appearing characters in the specific effect state (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) is determined, and when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing characters are determined in the determined order. In some cases, the appearance character may be determined by lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific effect display is performed when it is not determined that an advantageous state should be given, an appearing character that is not stored as a winning character is determined in the order of determination. Is configured. That is, in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed, the appearance character can be determined to be active or inactive within a range in which there is no discrepancy in the jackpot expectation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to match the jackpot expectation while ensuring the randomness of the appearing characters when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, and it is possible to improve interest. ..

[Item effect processing during RUSH mode]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the RUSH mode item effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The item effect process during the RUSH mode is a process for controlling the item effect in the RUSH mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 51, in S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 1. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether it is the start time of the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 1, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S461. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is not 1, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S462.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an initial item by lottery. In this embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 61, an item display area 800 (item area) capable of displaying a plurality of items is provided in the display area 4A in the RUSH mode. The item display area 800 is a first item display area 801 that displays the first item, a second item display area 802 that displays the second item, and a third item display area 803 that displays the third item. , And a fourth item display area 804 that displays a fourth item, and the area of the item display area 800 excluding the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804 is a frame as an item area frame display area. It is possible to perform the effect display in the display mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the type of item displayed in the first item display area 801 by lottery. The types of items displayed in the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804 will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S470.

In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the item prefetch pattern is being executed. The item pre-reading pattern is an effect pattern for determining the type of item by "pre-reading effect". In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the item prefetch pattern is being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S465. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the item prefetch pattern is not being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S463.

In S463, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item preread pattern based on the number of holdings, the presence/absence of a hit in the holding, the type of hit, and the current item. In this process, the sub CPU 71, for example, the number of holding is "4", there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in this hold "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" (time saving Medium hit 12R-1 or time saving medium hit 12R-2), and when "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item, the first item display area has a predetermined probability. It is determined to execute the item prefetch pattern in which four "item 1" are displayed in the 801 to second item display area 804 (four "item 1" are aligned).

Also, for example, the number of holding is "4", there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 8" of the second special symbol (8R per hour saving time), as the current item When "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, three "item 1" are displayed in the first item display area 801 to the second item display area 804 with a predetermined probability. It is determined to execute the item prefetch pattern (three "item 1" are collected).

Also, for example, the number of holds is "4", there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 9" of the second special symbol (4R per hour saving time), as the current item If "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, two "item 1" are displayed in the first item display area 801 to the second item display area 804 with a predetermined probability. It is determined to execute the item prefetch pattern (two "item 1" are collected). When this process ends, the process moves to S464.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a hit is included in the hold, the number of items displayed in the item area is different depending on the number of rounds in the big hit game state that shifts depending on the hit. Therefore, when the big hit game state is reached when two items are arranged in the item area, the number of rounds is 4R, and it is highly possible that the number of game media that can be acquired is the smallest. If you move to the big hit game state when there are 3 of them, it is highly possible that the number of rounds is 8R, the number of game media that can be acquired is medium, and there are 4 items in the item area. If the state shifts to the big hit game state, the number of rounds is 12R, and it is highly possible that the number of game media that can be acquired is the largest. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify not only the jackpot expectation but also information about the number of game media that can be obtained when the game state is shifted to the jackpot (the number of expected game media to be obtained). I am trying.

However, in the above example, even when the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 9" of the second special symbol (4R per hour saving time), the item pre-reading pattern in which three items are complete is determined. Alternatively, the item pre-reading pattern with four items may be determined. Further, even when the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 8" of the second special symbol (8R per time saving/shortening), the item pre-reading pattern with two items may be determined. Alternatively, an item pre-reading pattern with four items may be determined. Also, if the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" of the second special symbol (12R-1 per hour/time/short/12R-2 per hour/hour/short), two items will be available. The item pre-reading pattern may be determined, or the item pre-reading pattern with three items may be determined. In other words, if the number of collected items is relatively high, the expected number of game media to be acquired is relatively high, and if the number of aligned items is small, the number of expected game media to be acquired is relatively low. Good.

In S464, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determination result of S463 determines execution of the item prefetch pattern. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the execution of the item prefetch pattern is determined, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S465. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the execution of the item prefetch pattern is not determined, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S466.

In S465, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an item according to the item prefetch pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the same item as the item displayed in the first item display area 801, for example, when an item prefetch pattern in which two items are arranged is determined. I do. When this process ends, the process moves to S470.

In S466, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an item by lottery based on the number of holds, the presence/absence of a hit in the hold, the type of hit, and the current item. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 determines that, for example, when the number of reservations is “4”, there is a hit in the reservation, and “item 1” is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item. , “Item 1” is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, it is easy for two “Item 1” to be equal to or more than one). On the other hand, when the number of reservations is “4”, there is no hit in the reservation, and “item 1” is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item, the “item 1” is relatively high in probability. Items other than "item 1" are determined (that is, it is difficult for two or more "item 1" to be available).

Further, for example, the number of holding is "4", there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" ~ "big hit 8" of the second special symbol (12R-1 per hour saving time, It is 12R-2 per hour, and 8R per hour, and as the current item, "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 and "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802. If so, “item 1” is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, it is easy for 3 or more “item 1” to be complete). On the other hand, the number of holds is "4", there is no hit in the hold, or there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "big hit 9" (4R ), and when “item 1” is displayed as the current item in the first item display area 801 and “item 1” is displayed in the second item display area 802, there is a relatively high probability. Items other than "item 1" are determined (that is, it is difficult for three or more "item 1" to be available).

Further, for example, the number of holding is "4", there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" of the second special symbol (12R-1 per hour saving time) Time saving is 12R-2), "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802, and the third item display area is the current item. When “item 1” is displayed in 803, “item 1” is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, 4 or more “item 1” are likely to be collected). On the other hand, the number of holds is "4", there is no hit in the hold, or there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in this hold is "big hit 8" or "big hit 9" of the second special symbol It is (8R per hour saving time or 4R per hour saving time), "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 and "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802 as the current item. When “item 1” is displayed in the 3 item display area 803, items other than “item 1” are determined with a relatively high probability (that is, it is difficult for 4 or more “item 1” to be gathered). ). When this process ends, the process moves to S467.

In S467, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is "rainbow" in the hold display mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a big hit is confirmed or a display mode (rainbow) with an extremely high big hit expectation degree is determined as the prefetch pending change effect content or the fluctuation pending change effect content. .. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that “holding display” is “rainbow”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S468. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no “rainbow” in the hold display mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S470.

In S468, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the items determined by the process of S465 or the process of S466 are three items or more. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of the determined items is three or more, the process proceeds to S469. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined items are not more than three items, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S470. In this process, it may be determined whether or not the determined item has two or more items, or whether or not the determined item has four or more items. You may do it.

In S469, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of re-determining an item from a group of items different from the determined group of items by lottery. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the items so that the number of items does not become three or more (or two or four) when there is "rainbow" in the hold display mode. At this time, the item to be re-determined is determined from a group different from the group of items displayed in the first item display area 801. The group of items will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S470.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a particular display mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, display mode (rainbow)) is displayed as the hold display mode, a predetermined number (for example, 3) is displayed as the RUSH mode item effect. It is controlled so that the above items are not available. That is, when it is informed that the jackpot expectation is high, the number of expected expected game media is not informed.

In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the item area display according to the item determined by the process of S465, the process of S466, or the process of S469. In this processing, for example, when the item determined this time is “item 1”, the sub CPU 71 displays this “item 1” in the first item display area 801, and until then, the first item display area 801. The item displayed in the second item display area 802 is shifted and displayed, and the item displayed in the second item display area 802 is shifted to the third item display area 803 and displayed until then. The item displayed in the third item display area 803 is shifted and displayed in the fourth item display area 804, and the item displayed in the fourth item display area 804 until then is cleared. When this process ends, the process moves to S471.

In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the items displayed in the item display area 800 (item area) are three or more items. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of items is three or more, the process proceeds to S472. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of items is not three or more, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S473. In addition, in this process, it may be determined whether or not two or more items are provided, or it may be determined whether or not four items are provided.

In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the special mode, based on the presence/absence of a hit in the hold and the type of hit. .. In this process, the sub CPU 71, for example, there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in the hold is the second special symbol "big hit 6" ~ "big hit 8" (time saving medium hit 12R-1, time saving medium hit 12R-2 or 8R per hour reduction), and when three items are complete, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is changed from the frame display mode (white) as the normal mode to the special mode with a predetermined probability. It is decided to change to the frame display mode (green).

Further, for example, there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in this hold is the "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" of the second special symbol (12R-1 per hour saving time middle or 12R-2 per hour saving time) In the case of a set of four items, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is changed from the frame display mode (white) as the normal mode (or the frame display mode (green) as the special mode) with a predetermined probability. It is decided to change the frame display mode (red) as a special mode. In addition, there is no hit in the hold, or there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "big hit 9" (4R per hour saving time), more than 3 items Also in the case of, it may be determined with a probability lower than the predetermined probability that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the frame display mode (green) or the frame display mode (red) as a special mode. .. When this process ends, the process moves to S475.

In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the special mode. That is, when the number of items is less than three, the sub CPU 71 continues to perform a process of determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area remains the special mode. In this processing, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the special mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S474. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is not the special mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the RUSH mode item effect processing routine.

In S474, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether to set the frame display mode in the item area frame display area to the normal mode, based on the presence/absence of a hit in the hold and the hit type. In this processing, for example, when there is no hit in the hold, the sub CPU 71 changes the frame display mode in the item area frame display area from the frame display mode (green) as a special mode or the frame display mode (red) to normal. It is determined to change to the frame display mode (white) as the mode. Further, for example, if there is a hit in the hold, if the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 9" of the second special symbol (4R per hour saving time), in the item area frame display area with a predetermined probability. It is decided to keep the frame display mode as the special mode.

Further, for example, there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "big hit 6" ~ "big hit 8" (time saving medium hit 12R-1, time saving medium hit 12R-2 or time saving hit) 8R), and when the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the frame display mode (green) as the special mode, it is determined that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area remains the special mode. To do.

Further, for example, there is a hit in the hold, the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "big hit 6" ~ "big hit 8" (time saving medium hit 12R-1, time saving medium hit 12R-2 or time saving hit) 8R), and when the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the frame display mode (red) as the special mode, it is determined that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area remains the special mode. To do. In addition, when the type of hit in the hold is the second special symbol "big hit 8" (8R per hour saving time), there is a predetermined probability that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is a frame display as a normal mode. It may be decided to change the mode (white). When this process ends, the process moves to S475.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the item production in the RUSH mode, when a predetermined number (for example, three) or more items are prepared, the display content of the item area itself (for example, the frame display in the item area frame display area is displayed. Aspect) may also change, and when it changes, it is controlled so that the jackpot expectation and the expected number of game media to be acquired are increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the item production in the RUSH mode, the display content of the item area itself is displayed even when the display content of the item area itself is changed and the predetermined number or more items are not available. If is still changed, it is controlled so that the jackpot expectation degree and the expected number of game media to be won are continuously maintained. As a result, even if the aspect of the item displayed in the specific display area does not satisfy the predetermined degree of expectation, the expectation for the big hit is maintained and the interest of the game is reduced. Is being prevented.

In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the frame display mode of the item area according to the determination result of S472 or S474. When this process ends, the item effect process routine in the RUSH mode ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first information displayed in the first information display unit (for example, the first reserved sphere display area 701, the second reserved sphere display area 702, the variable reserved sphere display area 703) ( For example, the expected jackpot degree is notified by the display mode of the (holding ball), and the expected expected game is acquired by the display mode of the second information (for example, item) displayed by the second information display means (for example, the item display area 800). The number of media is configured to be notified. That is, by summing up these pieces of information, it is possible to infer which of the specific game states (for example, the big hit game state) is highly expected. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation, and to notify more diverse information in a novel manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the first information is a specific display mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, the display mode (rainbow)), the second information display unit has the same display mode. The information of 2 is not continuously displayed for a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. With such a configuration, for example, it is notified that the expected number of game media to be acquired is low, even though it is informed that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. You can Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification even though it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition (for example, three items or more) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display unit, the display of the second information display unit itself is further performed. The contents (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may change, and when it changes, the jackpot expectation degree and/or the expected number of game media to be acquired are configured to change. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the content of the notification on the second information display means and enhance the interest of the game.

[Processing in normal mode]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the processing in the normal mode executed by the sub CPU 71. This normal mode process is a process for determining the effect contents in the normal mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 52, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether “04H”, “08H”, or “12H” is determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is for performing the operation-linked effect. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that “04H”, “08H”, or “12H” is determined as the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S481. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that “04H”, “08H”, or “12H” is not determined as the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S482.

In S481, the sub CPU 71 refers to the operation-linked effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, and based on the type of the variation pattern designation command and the sub-effect selecting random number range (lottery value), the operation-linked effect scenario. A process for determining (operation linked production scenario) is performed. When this process ends, the normal mode processing routine ends.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub effect content determination table for normal mode (not shown), the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, the sub effect selection random number range (lottery value), and the like. Based on and, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. When this process ends, the normal mode processing routine ends.

[Hold display mode change effect processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the pending display mode change effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hold display mode change effect process is a process for controlling the prefetch hold change effect and the change hold change effect, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 53, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the prefetch pending change pattern is being executed. The pre-reading pending change pattern is an effect pattern for executing the effect (pre-reading pending display mode change effect) of changing the pending display mode by the “pre-reading effect”, an example of which is shown in FIGS. 13 and 14. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch pending change pattern is being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S494. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch pending change pattern is not being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S491.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the prefetch pending display mode change effect for the target change. The target variation indicates a holding ball (starting memory) that is a target of the prefetching hold display mode change effect. On the other hand, the fluctuation indicates a reserved ball (starting memory) used in the special symbol game (the game) of this time. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the “prefetching effect” due to the change in the hold display mode. As described above, the main CPU 61 may determine whether or not to execute the “prefetching effect” due to the change in the hold display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S492.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the determination result of S491 is to execute the prefetch pending display mode change effect. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch pending display mode change effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S493. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch pending display mode change effect is not to be executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S496.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 refers to the pre-reading pending change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, and the winning lottery result, the number of holdings, and the fluctuation pattern associated with the pre-reading target fluctuation (FIG. 12). (See) and the process of determining the read-ahead pending change pattern. Note that various parameters for determining the prefetch pending change pattern can be set as appropriate. For example, in this processing, the sub CPU 71 determines the prefetch pending change pattern based on the winning lottery result and the pending number. Alternatively, the prefetch pending change pattern may be determined based on the winning lottery result or the number of pending calls. When this process ends, the process moves to S494.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the change of the target change of the prefetching is started. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the holding ball (starting memory) that is the target of the prefetching hold display mode change effect is used in the special symbol game (the game) of this time. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the change of the pre-read target change is started, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S496. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the change of the pre-read target change is not started, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S495.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the hold display mode according to the prefetch hold change pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4) or the second special symbol starting storage area (4) when, for example, the "prefetch pending change pattern 405" is determined. The display mode of the reserved ball corresponding to the starting memory (holding 4) is displayed as the display mode (white), and then the starting memory is the first special symbol starting memory region (3) or the second special symbol starting memory region ( As it is shifted and stored in 3), the display mode of the holding ball corresponding to the starting memory (holding 3) is displayed as the display mode (blue), and then the starting memory is the first special symbol starting memory. As the area (2) or the second special symbol starting storage area (2) is shifted and stored, the display mode of the holding ball corresponding to the starting storage (holding 2) is displayed as the display mode (yellow). Then, as the start memory is shifted and stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) or the second special symbol start memory area (1), the hold corresponding to the start memory (hold 1) The display mode of the sphere is displayed as a display mode (green). When this process ends, the hold display mode change effect process routine ends.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the suspension display mode of the change is the display mode (rainbow). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending display mode of the fluctuation is the display mode (rainbow), the sub CPU 71 ends the pending display mode change effect processing routine. In the present embodiment, the display mode (rainbow) has the highest jackpot expectation as the hold display mode. Therefore, when the hold display mode of the change is the display mode (rainbow), the change described later. The pending change pattern is not decided. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pending display mode is not the display mode (rainbow), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S497 to determine the fluctuation pending change pattern described later.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 refers to the fluctuation pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, and wins the lottery result, the pseudo consecutive number, and a fluctuation pattern associated with the fluctuation (see FIG. 12). Based on the above, the processing for determining the fluctuation pending change pattern is performed. Note that various parameters for determining the fluctuation-holding change pattern can be set as appropriate. For example, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the fluctuation-holding change pattern based on the winning lottery result and the number of pseudo stations. Alternatively, the variation hold change pattern may be determined based on the winning lottery result or the pseudo continuous number. When this process ends, the process moves to S498.

In step S498, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the hold display mode according to the variation hold change pattern. In this processing, for example, when the “variation hold change pattern 505” is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the display mode of the hold ball displayed as the display mode (white) at the start of the change to 1 It is displayed as a display mode (blue) at the time of executing the second pseudo run (pseudo run 1), as a display mode (yellow) at the execution of the second pseudo run (pseudo run 2), and is displayed as the display mode of the third pseudo run. Is displayed as a display mode (green) during execution (pseudo run 3) and is displayed as a display mode (red) during execution of the fourth pseudo run (pseudo run 4). When this process ends, the hold display mode change effect process routine ends.

In the present embodiment, while the prefetch pending change pattern is being executed, when the target change becomes the change, it is determined whether or not to execute the change hold change pattern. Not limited to this, for example, it may be determined whether or not to execute the variable pending change pattern even while the prefetch pending change pattern is being executed. In this case, the prefetch pending change pattern and the variable pending change pattern may be executed in parallel. Further, in this case, when it is determined to execute the variable hold change pattern, the read ahead hold change pattern may be changed according to the determination result. A plurality of branches may be provided in advance in consideration of the change in the hold display mode due to the variation hold change pattern. Further, in this case, with respect to the read-ahead hold change pattern, the read-ahead hold change pattern in which the variable hold change pattern can be changed and the hold display mode in which the variable hold change pattern cannot be changed can be changed. The read pending change pattern may be determined in advance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the information (for example, the reserved ball) corresponding to the starting memory information is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the starting memory information is started. It is decided and not only the big hit announcement is given by changing the display mode according to the decision result, but also it is decided whether or not to change when the variable display of the identification information using the starting memory information is started. The big hit announcement is made by changing the display mode according to the determination result. That is, not only is it determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed by the so-called "prefetching effect", but it is also determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed in the change. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information in the fluctuation, whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) and a specific symbol fluctuation display (for example, , Pseudo-repeated) (for example, the number of pseudo-repeated), the content of the change in the display mode is determined. With such a configuration, for example, even when the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information does not change until the variation starts, the information corresponding to the startup memory information is displayed in the variation. Since the aspect may change, expectation of a big hit can be given in every variation. Further, since the content of the change in the display mode is determined by the number of pseudo stations, it is possible to give a highly entertaining jackpot notice due to the execution of the pseudo series and the change in the display mode of the holding balls in the variation.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information is changed in the fluctuation, if the display mode is changed before the fluctuation starts, the display mode after the change is changed. It is configured to determine the content of the change in the display mode based on the display mode and whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state). With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information changed before the fluctuation starts is inherited in the fluctuation, and the display mode changes in the fluctuation. Since the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode may increase, the change in the display mode of the reserved ball due to the so-called "pre-reading effect" and the change in the display mode of the reserved ball in the variation are linked to each other. You can give a big jackpot notice.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information changed before the fluctuation starts is a specific display mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, display mode (rainbow)). In this case, the display mode is not changed in the change. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification, even though it is informed that the jackpot expectation is high. The control load can be reduced.

[Processing at the start of hit]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a hit start process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit start process is a process for updating the winning character history and the acquired music history described above, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 54, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a hit start time in the RUSH mode. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is the start time of the hit in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S501. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not the time to start the hit in the RUSH mode, it ends the hit start processing routine.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether "17H" has been determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is one that produces a "winning battle reach hit" effect. In this processing, when the sub CPU 71 determines that “17H” has been determined as the variation pattern, the processing proceeds to S502. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that “17H” has not been determined as the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S505.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the opponent character is a winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the opponent character that has appeared in the present “kakekko battle reach hit” effect is the character stored in the won character history. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the opponent character has been a winning character, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start process routine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the fighting character is not a winning character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the battle character to a winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the fighting character that has appeared in the present "kakekko battle reach hit" effect as winning in the winning character history. When this process ends, the process moves to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the music corresponding to the battle character to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the music corresponding to the battle character that has appeared in the "Kakeko Battle Reach Hit" effect this time as acquired in the acquired music history. When this process ends, the process moves to S509.

In S505, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether "18H" has been determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is for performing the "special character battle reach hit" effect. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that “18H” has been determined as the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S506. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that “18H” has not been determined as the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start processing routine.

In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the character 1 has been a winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the character 1 that appears in the "special character battle reach hit" effect this time is a character stored in the winning character history. In this processing, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the character 1 has been a winning character, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start processing routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the character 1 is not the winning character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the character 1 to a winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the character 1 that has appeared in the "special character battle reach hit" effect this time as having been won in the winning character history. When this process ends, the process moves to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the music corresponding to the character 1 to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the music corresponding to the character 1 that appears in the "special character battle reach hit" effect this time as acquired in the acquired music history. When this process ends, the process moves to S509.

In S509, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all the characters have been won. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all the characters 1 to 12 are stored as won in the winning character history. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that all the characters have been won, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S510. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that all the characters have not been won, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start processing routine.

In S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the special music with the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the special music as acquired in the acquired music history as a special privilege for winning all the characters (winning). When this process ends, the hit start process routine ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kekko Battle" that notifies whether or not an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) is given. Reach" effect) and a special effect display (for example, "special character battle reach" effect) for notifying that an advantageous state is given are configured. Further, in the present embodiment, when the determination order (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) of the appearing characters (for example, the fighting characters) appearing in the specific effect display is determined, and when the specific effect display is performed, this It is configured to further determine whether or not to determine the appearing character in the order of determination. Then, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the appearance character is determined in the order of determination when a specific effect display is performed, the appearance character is determined in the order of determination, and the determination order is determined. When it is not decided to decide the appearing character, the appearing character is decided by lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific character (for example, character 1) that appears in a special effect display is determined in the specific effect display in the order of determination, the order of determination is determined. It is configured to be relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a particular effect state, not only is the assignment of the advantageous state confirmed, but also a character that normally does not appear appears.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve interest in a series of effects (for example, battle effects) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific effect display is performed when it is determined that the advantageous state is given in the specific effect state, the appearance character in the specific effect display is the winning character. When the specific effect display is performed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not given, the appearing character stored as the winning character is not determined. That is, in the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed and the appearance character stored as the winning character appears, the advantageous state is determined to be given. Further, in the present embodiment, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, a specific character is also stored as a winning character.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the series of effects executed in the predetermined game section progresses, the jackpot expectation degree in the specific effect display can be changed, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the specific effect state, the winning character history in the previous specific effect state can be inherited, and when the winning character history is inherited, it is determined. The determination order of the appearing characters is also inherited. With such a configuration, depending on the presence or absence of the takeover selection operation, a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section can be started from a state desired by the player, and a jackpot expectation degree in a specific effect display can be obtained. Can be changed, and interest can be improved.

[V winning process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the V winning award process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V winning time process is a process for determining the effect contents of a V winning effect, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 55, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the RUSH mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a V prize has been won in any of the big hit game states which have been shifted from the RUSH mode. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is in the RUSH mode, it shifts the process to S521. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not in the RUSH mode, it ends the V winning time process routine. The sub CPU 71 may perform the process of S521 without performing this process. That is, the sub CPU 71 may perform the following processes of S521 to S523 even in the normal mode and the special mode, for example.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a hit in the hold. That is, the sub-CPU 71, the first special symbol starting storage area (1) ~ (4) or the second special symbol starting storage area (1) ~ (4) of the starting memory stored in the result of the lottery Perform processing to determine whether or not there are any. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a hit in the hold, the process moves to S522. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no hit in the hold, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S523. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol game, the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) rather than the starting storage stored in the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4). Since the starting memory stored in is preferentially used, in this process, among the starting memories stored in the second special symbol starting memory areas (1) to (4), the lottery result is a hit. It may be possible to determine only whether or not there is any.

In S522, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting special V winning award effect data. When this process ends, the V winning process routine ends. Note that an example of the V-winning effect based on the special V-winning effect data will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S523, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the normal V winning time effect data. When this process ends, the V winning process routine ends. Note that an example of the V-winning effect based on the normal V-winning effect data will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

In addition, in this V winning process, when it is determined in S520 that it is not in the RUSH mode, the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished (for example, "the jackpot 1 of the first special symbol" ~ "Big hit 4") is determined, when it is determined that it is a big hit to transition to the time saving game state, it is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) ~ (4) Of the starting memory, it is determined only whether or not there is a winning lottery result, and when it is determined that there is a winning lottery result, the process of S522 is performed and the lottery result If it is determined that there is no hit, the process of S523 may be performed. That is, when the V is won in the first big hit game state that is to be shifted from the normal mode to the RUSH mode, among the starting memories stored in the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4), the lottery You may make it suggest that the result is a hit. Further, the sub CPU 71 may perform these processes even when it is determined in S520 that the RUSH mode is being performed. That is, even when the V prize is won in the RUSH mode, it is suggested that among the starting memories stored in the first special symbol starting memory areas (1) to (4), the lottery result is a win. You may do so. As a result, even if the RUSH mode ends in the subsequent game and shifts to the normal mode, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that it may be possible to shift to the RUSH mode again, which improves the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

[Demonstration performed on game machines]
Next, various effects in the present embodiment will be described using screen display examples and the like with reference to FIGS.

[Screen display example of operation-linked performance]
56 to 58 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the operation-linked effect. 56 to 58, a case where "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation-linked effect, when the current stage is "0" to "3", the display area 4A is called "continuous hit!" in order to encourage the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A. An image schematically showing the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is displayed together with the characters.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, in each stage, when the stage shifts (that is, when the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift “present” is determined), images corresponding to the characters 1 to 3 are displayed. Are sequentially displayed. On the other hand, when the stage does not shift (that is, when the push operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined, or when the push operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage is maintained, Images corresponding to characters 1 to 3 do not increase. Then, in each stage, when the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, in the case of the variation pattern “04H” (operation-linked effect failure), the operation-linked effect fails and the effect is not developed. For this reason, the characters "Sorry...not all gathered..." are displayed, and in the case of the variation pattern "08H" or "12H" (operation-linked production success), operation-linked production has failed but reversed. Then, the characters "I feel sorry... and develop into reach!" are displayed to inform that the production will develop.

As shown in FIG. 57, when the current stage is "4" to "7" in the display area 4A in the operation-linked effect, "continuous hit!" is called to prompt the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A. An image schematically showing the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is displayed together with the characters. It should be noted that when the current stage is "7", since it is a conditional stage transition period, it is not necessary to urge the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A, but the same contents as the other steps are intentionally taken. By displaying, the player is made to feel uncomfortable that even if he/she presses the press operation button 9A, it is difficult to move to the next stage. However, when the current stage is the conditional stage transition period, an image different from other stages may be displayed. For example, an image schematically showing that the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is invalidated (the step does not shift even if the pressing operation button 9A is operated) together with the character "?" It may be displayed, or an image with a different background color or character color may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in each stage, when the stage shifts (that is, when the current stage is "4" to "6", the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "present" is determined. If the current step is “7”, and the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the lapse of the conditional step transition period), the images corresponding to the characters 4 to 7 are sequentially increased and displayed. ing. On the other hand, when the stage does not shift (that is, when the current stage is “4” to “6”), the push operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined, or the push operation button 9A Is not operated, the current stage is “7”, and the press operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage is maintained and the images corresponding to the characters 4 to 7 are not increased. Then, in each stage, when the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, in the case of the variation pattern “04H” (operation-linked effect failure), the operation-linked effect fails and the effect is not developed. For this reason, the characters "Sorry...not all gathered..." are displayed, and in the case of the variation pattern "08H" or "12H" (operation-linked production success), operation-linked production has failed but reversed. Then, the characters "I feel sorry... and develop into reach!" are displayed to inform that the production will develop.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the operation-linked effect, when the current stage is "8" to "11", the display area 4A is called "continuous hit!" in order to prompt the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A. An image schematically showing the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is displayed together with the characters.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, when the current stage is “8” to “10”, the stage shifts (that is, when the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift “present” is determined). In (), the images corresponding to the characters 8 to 11 are sequentially displayed in increments. When the current stage is “11” and the stage shifts (that is, when the push operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift “present” is determined), the image corresponding to the character 12 is displayed. After the numbers are increased and displayed, the characters "all gathered!! Develop to reach!" are displayed to notify that the operation-linked effect has been successful and the effect will be developed. On the other hand, in each stage, if the stage does not shift (that is, if the push operation button 9A is operated but the stage shift “none” is determined, or if the push operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage Is maintained and the images corresponding to the characters 8 to 12 are not increased. Then, in each stage, when the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, in the case of the variation pattern “04H” (operation-linked effect failure), the operation-linked effect fails and the effect is not developed. For this reason, the characters "Sorry...not all gathered..." are displayed, and in the case of the variation pattern "08H" or "12H" (operation-linked production success), operation-linked production has failed but reversed. Then, the characters "I feel sorry... and develop into reach!" are displayed to inform that the production will develop.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages (for example, “0” to “11”) are sequentially shifted, and when the final effect stage is transitioned to, a predetermined effect (for example, super reach C) is performed. In a specific effect (for example, operation-linked effect) in which is performed, when the current effect stage is a predetermined effect stage, a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A) is performed. Under the condition, whether or not to shift to the next rendering stage is determined by lottery, and if it is a specific rendering stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period), after a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, a condition It is configured to always shift to the next performance stage on condition that a predetermined operation is performed after the addition stage transition period has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to give a more interesting big hit announcement.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the current performance stage is a specific performance stage, if a predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has passed, the When the predetermined operation is performed before the predetermined period elapses, the process is not shifted to the next effect stage. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a state in which the production stage does not shift even when a predetermined operation is performed and a state in which the production stage always shifts when the predetermined operation is performed, in a specific production. Therefore, it is possible to give a feeling of strangeness to the player who was able to smoothly shift the production stage, and it is possible to diversify the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the current performance stage is a specific performance stage, a predetermined operation is invalidated during a predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to control the effect so as to be more interlocked with the operation of the player at a specific effect stage, and it is possible to improve the interest in the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when a specific effect is performed based on a specific effect pattern (for example, operation-linked effect success) that may shift to the final effect step, the final effect step is performed. Although there is a case where the transition does not occur, in this case, it is configured to perform a predetermined effect after performing a notice effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure→reverse effect) that gives advance notice that a predetermined effect will be performed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the transition of the production stage, but to give a certain expectation to the big hit when a specific production is performed.

[Screen display example of the takeover selection operation screen]
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a screen display example of a takeover selection operation screen. In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 described later, an operation guide display area 710 is provided in the display area 4A for guiding that the selection operation is possible by rotating the jog dial 9B and that the decision operation is possible by pressing the press operation button 9A. Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the display area 4A on the transfer selection operation screen, the character "remaining 10 seconds" indicating the transfer selection operation valid time is displayed, and in order to prompt the user to decide whether to accept the transfer of the winning character history. , "Do you want to continue winning character history?" and "Yes/No" are displayed. The player can take over the winning character history by rotating the jog dial 9B, selecting "Yes", and pressing the pressing operation button 9A. Further, by rotating the jog dial 9B, selecting "NO" and pressing the push operation button 9A, it is possible to prevent the winning character history from being taken over. Further, it is possible to prevent the winning character history from being taken over by allowing the takeover selection operation valid time to elapse without performing any operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the display area 4A on the transfer selection operation screen, accompanying the transfer of the winning character history, the acquired music is transferred, and the RUSH mode scenario is transferred. As shown in the figure, the characters “If you take over the history of the characters that have been won, the probability that the song has been acquired/the appearance probability of the opponent character will also be taken over” will be displayed.

[Screen display example of music selection operation screen]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the music selection operation screen.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the display area 4A on the music selection operation screen, the character "remaining 10 seconds" indicating the music selection operation valid time is displayed, and "the music is selected to prompt the selection of the music. "!", the character "Music 1" indicating the currently selected music, and a triangular cursor image are displayed. The player can select a desired song by rotating the jog dial 9B to change the currently selected song and pressing the push operation button 9A. Further, it is possible to select a default music piece by allowing the music selection operation valid time to elapse without performing any operation.

[Screen display example during RUSH mode]
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a screen display example in the RUSH mode. As shown in FIG. 61, in the RUSH mode, in the display area 4A, a symbol variable display area 700 for variable display and stop display of a plurality of decorative symbols, the above-mentioned first reserved ball display area 701, and second reserved ball display. An area 702 and a variation holding sphere display area 703 are provided. In the present embodiment, the symbol variable display area 700, the first reserved sphere display area 701, the second reserved sphere display area 702, and the variable reserved sphere display area 703 are used for other effect modes (for example, normal mode and special mode). Mode) is also displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, in the RUSH mode, the above-mentioned item display area 800 is provided in the display area 4A, and in the item display area 800, the above-mentioned first item display area 801 and second item A display area 802, a third item display area 803, and a fourth item display area 804 are provided. In the present embodiment, the same item effect as in the RUSH mode may be performed during the effect mode other than the RUSH mode (for example, the normal mode or the special mode). In this case, the item display area 800, The first item display area 801, the second item display area 802, the third item display area 803, and the fourth item display area 804 are displayed in other effect modes (for example, normal mode and special mode). May be.

In the display area 4A, the position and size of the symbol variable display area 700, the first reserved sphere display area 701, the second reserved sphere display area 702, the variable reserved sphere display area 703, and the item display area 800, The range and the like are not limited to those shown in FIG. 61, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the second reserved sphere display area 702 and the item display area 800 are arranged in parallel, and the display mode of the reserved sphere displayed in the second reserved sphere display area 702 and the item displayed in the item display area 800 are updated. May be displayed in conjunction with the update.

[Example of items used in item production in RUSH mode]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of items used in the item effect in the RUSH mode.

As shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, 12 items “item 1” to “item 12” corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 12 are defined, and one of these items is the first item. Each item is displayed in each of the 1-item display area 801 to the 4th item display area 804.

In addition, "item 1" to "item 12" may be images schematically showing the characters 1 to 12 themselves, or images showing respective ornaments (for example, weapons) of the characters 1 to 12. It may be. In addition, a special item that does not correspond to the characters 1 to 12 is defined, and when this special item is displayed, the jackpot expectation level or the expectation of winning is larger than when "Item 1" to "Item 12" are displayed. The number of game media may be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, items corresponding to odd-numbered characters, items 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 form a first group (odd-numbered group), and even-numbered characters are included. The items, items 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12 corresponding to the above, constitute a second group (even group). This group (grouping) is referred to in S469 of FIG. 51, but it may be referred to for other purposes. For example, when it is desired to suggest the expected degree of a predetermined jackpot (eg, “bonnet 7” of the first special symbol) whose actual round number is an odd number (eg, 7R), an item is selected from the first group. In this way, if you want to suggest the expectation of a specific jackpot (eg, “big jackpot 2” of the first special symbol) whose actual round number is an even number (eg, 8R), select an item from the second group. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the information (second information) displayed in each of the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804, “item 1” to “item 12” will be described as an example. However, the second information is not necessarily limited to the “item”, and other information as long as the information has a plurality of types of display modes with which the player can recognize that the information is different. Can also be used. For example, 12 types of characters, numbers, or information composed of characters may be used. Further, the second information may have at least two or more different display modes, and the types are not limited to twelve.

[Screen display example of item production in RUSH mode]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the item effect in the RUSH mode. Note that, in FIG. 63, the display in the item display area 800 (item area) which is a part of the display area 4A is described.

In (a) of FIG. 63, "item 1" is displayed as the first item in the first item display area 801 in the item area. At this time, when it is determined to display “item 3” as the second item, as shown in FIG. 63(b), “item 1” displayed in the first item display area 801 is displayed. Is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802, and “item 3” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. On the other hand, when it is determined to display “item 1” as the second item, “item 1” displayed in the first item display area 801 is displayed as shown in (c) of FIG. 63. Is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802, and “item 1” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801.

Next, when it is decided to display “item 4” as the third item, as shown in (d) of FIG. 63, the first item display area 801 and the second item display area 802 are displayed. The displayed "item 1" is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803, and "item 4" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. Here, in the states of (c) and (d) of FIG. 63, two “item 1”s are complete. Therefore, when the big hit game state is entered at this time, there is a high possibility that the actual number of rounds is a big hit of 4R (for example, 4R for a short working time). That is, the expected number of game media to be acquired is lower than that in the case of three or four as described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined to display “item 1” as the third item, the display is performed in the first item display area 801 and the second item display area 802 as shown in (e) of FIG. 63. The displayed “item 1” is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803, and “item 1” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. At this time, when it is determined to change the item area frame display mode to the special mode, the item area frame display mode changes to the special mode (green). In this case, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the frame display mode of the item area is the normal mode (white).

Next, when it is determined to display “item 2” as the fourth item, as shown in (f) of FIG. 63, the first item display area 801 to the third item display area 803 are displayed. The displayed “item 1” is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802 to the fourth item display area 804, and “item 2” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. Here, in the states of (e) and (f) of FIG. 63, three “item 1”s are complete. Therefore, when the big hit game state is entered at this time, there is a high possibility that the actual number of rounds is a big hit of 8R (for example, 8R for a short working time). In other words, the expected number of game media to be acquired is higher than that in the case of the above two sets, and the number of expected game media to be acquired is lower than that in the case of the four sets described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined to display “item 1” as the fourth item, the items are displayed in the first item display area 801 to the third item display area 803 as shown in (g) of FIG. 63. The displayed “item 1” is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802 to the fourth item display area 804, and “item 1” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. Here, in the state of (g) of FIG. 63, four “item 1”s are complete. Therefore, when the big hit game state is entered at this time, there is a high possibility that the actual number of rounds is a big hit of 12R (for example, 12R-1, 12R-2 per hour saving time). That is, the number of expected game media to be acquired is higher than in the case of the above-mentioned two-piece set or three-piece set. At this time, when it is determined to change the frame display mode of the item area to the special mode, the frame display mode of the item area is changed to the special mode (red). In this case, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the frame display mode of the item area is the normal mode (white).

Further, in the state of (f) of FIG. 63, when it is decided to display “item 5” as the fifth item, as shown in (h) of FIG. 63, the fourth item display area is displayed. The "item 1" displayed on the screen is deleted, and the "item 1" displayed on the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803 is replaced by the third item display area 803 and the fourth item display area 804. “Item 2” that has been shifted and displayed in the first item display area 801 is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802, and “item 5” is newly displayed in the first item display area 802. It is displayed in the area 801. Further, at this time, when it is determined to change the frame display mode of the item area to the normal mode, the frame display mode of the item area is changed to the normal mode (white). At this time, if it is not decided to change the frame display mode of the item area to the normal mode and the frame display mode of the item area is maintained in the special mode, three items are not arranged. However, the expectation level of jackpots and the expected number of game media to be acquired, which are the same as in the case of three items, are maintained.

[Example of screen display of effect of changing display on hold]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a screen display of the suspended display mode change effect. In addition, in FIG. 64, the display in the second reserved sphere display area 702 or the variable reserved sphere display area 703 which is a part of the display area 4A is described. Further, in FIG. 64, when the “read-ahead pending change pattern 408” is determined as the read-ahead pending change pattern and the pending display mode at the start of the fluctuation is the display mode (green) as the fluctuation pending change pattern. When the first pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 1), the hold display mode is changed to the display mode (red), and when the second pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 2), the hold display mode is displayed (rainbow). ) Will be described as an example in which the variation hold change pattern to be changed to () is determined (for example, “the variation hold change pattern 310”).

As shown in FIG. 64, when the target change of prefetching is the fourth holding ball (holding 4) in the second holding ball display area 702, the fourth holding ball in the second holding ball display area 702 is changed. The display mode is changed to the display mode (blue).

Next, when the pre-reading target variation is the third holding ball (holding 3) in the second holding ball display area 702, the display mode of the third holding ball in the second holding ball display area 702 is changed. The display mode (yellow) is changed.

Next, when the pre-reading target variation is the second holding ball (holding 2) in the second holding ball display area 702, the display mode of the second holding ball in the second holding ball display area 702 is changed. The display mode (green) is changed.

Next, when the pre-reading target variation is the third holding ball (holding 1) in the second holding ball display area 702, the display mode of the first holding ball in the second holding ball display area 702 is changed. The display mode (green) is maintained.

Next, when the target change of the prefetch becomes the holding sphere in the fluctuation holding sphere display area 703 (the fluctuation), the display mode of the holding sphere in the fluctuation holding sphere display area 703 is maintained as the display mode (green). To do.

Next, when the pre-reading target variation is the holding sphere in the variation holding sphere display area 703 and the first pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 1), the holding sphere in the variation holding sphere display area 703 is executed. The display mode of is changed to the display mode (red).

Next, when the pre-reading target fluctuation is the holding sphere in the fluctuation holding sphere display area 703 and the second pseudo run is executed (pseudo run 2), the holding sphere in the fluctuation holding sphere display area 703 is executed. The display mode of is changed to the display mode (rainbow).

Note that, in FIG. 64, for convenience, the display mode of the reserved sphere other than the target change of the prefetch used in the description is described as the display mode (white) that is a normal display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, with respect to the display mode of the reserved sphere other than the target change of the prefetch used in the description, the preread pending change pattern or the fluctuation pending change pattern can be determined and the pending display mode can be sequentially changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the change in the display mode of the reserved balls, a mode in which the jackpot expectation degree is sequentially changed by the change in the display color of the reserved balls is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a change in the display mode of the holding sphere, a mode in which the jackpot expectation degree is sequentially changed depending on the shape or pattern of the holding sphere may be used. Further, each item displayed in the item area described above may be associated with the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation may be sequentially changed by changing the form of each item of the holding ball.

[Screen display example of V prize winning production]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a screen display of the V-winning effect. The upper part of FIG. 65 shows a screen display example of the V winning time effect based on the normal V winning effect data, and the lower part of FIG. 65 shows the V winning effect screen based on the special V winning effect data. An example is shown.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 65, since there is no hit in the hold in the V-winning performance based on the normal V-winning performance data, "Congratulations on V winning!" Is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, since there is a hit in the hold in the V-winning performance based on the special V-winning performance data, the message "Congratulations on V-winning" "!" and the character "and...??" to indicate that there is a hit in the hold.

In the V-winning effect based on the special V-winning effect data, a display may be provided to directly notify that there is a hit in the hold. For example, the characters “Congratulations on the condominium on hold” may be displayed to notify that there is a hit on hold.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (for example, big hit game state), the game medium passes through the specific region (for example, the specific region 38A) (V winning), and the special game state (for example, probability variation game state). When a transition condition to () is satisfied, a specific effect (for example, a V-winning effect) is performed, but in this case, it is determined in the starting memory information that is being held that the specific game state is to be transferred. When there is the starting memory information, the effect different from that when there is no starting memory information that is decided to shift to the specific game state is configured. That is, when the game state after the V prize is won and the specific game state is finished is determined, the fact that the game is held in suspension (or the possibility thereof) is notified together with that effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the specific game state is in a suspended state so as to improve the interest.

As described above, according to this embodiment, at least the following gaming machines according to the first to tenth inventions can be provided.

[Game Machine According to First and Second Inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the number of holdings is held based on the number of held starting memory information (holding number) and information indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an advantageous state (big hit lottery result) It has been proposed that the so-called "pre-reading effect" as a big hit announcement is performed by changing the display mode of the hold ball effect design indicating "(Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-70864).

However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, since the change pattern of the display mode of the hold ball effect design is only determined from a plurality of predetermined change patterns, the effect contents of the big hit announcement There was a problem that became monotonous.

The first and second inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a big hit notice that further enhances the player's expectation.

The first invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which a game medium can roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start memory information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area,
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means (whether to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player) For example, with the main CPU 61),
Based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display) Part 53, the second special symbol display part 54),
In accordance with the variable display of the identification information, a symbol variable display means (for example, a symbol variable display area 700) for performing variable display of symbols,
Of the starting storage information stored in the starting storage information storage means, a holding information display means for displaying information (for example, a holding ball) corresponding to the starting storage information used for variable display of the identification information from the next time onward. (For example, a first reserved sphere display area 701, a second reserved sphere display area 702),
Of the starting storage information stored in the starting storage information storage means, the variation information display means for displaying information corresponding to the starting storage information used for the variation display of the identification information this time (for example, the variation hold Sphere display area 703),
Whether to change the display mode of the information displayed on the holding information display means based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means And an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of shifting to the specific game state by changing the display mode of the information displayed on the on-hold information display means in accordance with the result of the decision (for example, pre-reading hold change effect) Pre-reading expectation notification effect producing means (for example, the sub CPU 71),
Whether to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means according to the determination result, to notify the degree of expectation to shift to the specific game state (for example, the variation hold change And a variation expectation notification production means (for example, the sub CPU 71)
The symbol variation display means, until the variable display of the identification information is stopped, temporarily stops the variable display of the symbols and then displays the specific symbol variation display (for example, pseudo-relation). It can be done multiple times,
The variation expectation notification production means is displayed on the variation information display means on the basis of the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means and the number of times of the specific symbol variation display (for example, the pseudo continuous number). It is a game machine characterized by changing a display mode of information.

In the first invention, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the information (for example, the reserved ball) corresponding to the starting memory information is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the starting memory information is started, By not only giving a big jackpot notice by changing the display mode according to the determination result, but also when changing display of the identification information using the starting memory information is also determined, It is configured to give a big hit announcement by changing the display mode in accordance with. That is, not only is it determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed by the so-called "prefetching effect", but it is also determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed in the change. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation.

Further, in the first invention, when changing the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information in the fluctuation, whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a specific symbol variation display ( For example, the content of the change in the display mode is determined based on the number of times (for example, the number of pseudo stations) (for example, the number of pseudo stations). With such a configuration, for example, even when the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information does not change until the variation starts, the information corresponding to the startup memory information is displayed in the variation. Since the aspect may change, expectation of a big hit can be given in every variation. Further, since the content of the change in the display mode is determined by the number of pseudo stations, it is possible to give a highly entertaining jackpot notice due to the execution of the pseudo series and the change in the display mode of the holding balls in the variation.

The second invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which a game medium can roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start memory information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area,
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means (whether to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player) For example, with the main CPU 61),
Based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display) Part 53, the second special symbol display part 54),
In accordance with the variable display of the identification information, a symbol variable display means (for example, a symbol variable display area 700) for performing variable display of symbols,
Of the starting storage information stored in the starting storage information storage means, a holding information display means for displaying information (for example, a holding ball) corresponding to the starting storage information used for variable display of the identification information from the next time onward. (For example, a first reserved sphere display area 701, a second reserved sphere display area 702),
Of the starting storage information stored in the starting storage information storage means, the variation information display means for displaying information corresponding to the starting storage information used for the variation display of the identification information this time (for example, the variation hold Sphere display area 703),
Whether to change the display mode of the information displayed on the holding information display means based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means And an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of shifting to the specific game state by changing the display mode of the information displayed on the on-hold information display means in accordance with the result of the decision (for example, pre-reading hold change effect) Pre-reading expectation notification effect producing means (for example, the sub CPU 71),
Whether to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means according to the determination result, to notify the degree of expectation to shift to the specific game state (for example, the variation hold change And a variation expectation notification production means (for example, the sub CPU 71)
When the display mode of the information displayed on the holding information display unit is changed by the pre-reading expectation level notification production unit, the change expectation level notification production unit, and the display mode after the change, The gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means is changed based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means.

In the second invention, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the information (for example, the reserved ball) corresponding to the starting memory information is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the starting memory information is started. By not only giving a big jackpot notice by changing the display mode according to the determination result, but also when changing display of the identification information using the starting memory information is also determined, It is configured to give a big hit announcement by changing the display mode in accordance with. That is, not only is it determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed by the so-called "prefetching effect", but it is also determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed in the change. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation.

Further, in the second invention, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information is changed in the fluctuation, if the display mode is changed before the fluctuation starts, after the change. It is configured to determine the content of the change of the display mode based on the display mode and whether to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state). With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information changed before the fluctuation starts is inherited in the fluctuation, and the display mode changes in the fluctuation. Since the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode may increase, the change in the display mode of the reserved ball due to the so-called "pre-reading effect" and the change in the display mode of the reserved ball in the variation are linked to each other. You can give a big jackpot notice.

The second invention is
The variation expectation notification production means causes the prefetching expectation notification production means to cause the display mode of the information displayed on the holding information display means to shift to the specific game state by the specific game state shift determination means. When it is changed to a specific display mode (for example, display mode (rainbow)) with a high degree of expectation determined to be, it is determined that the display mode of the information displayed on the fluctuation information display means is changed. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

Further, in the second invention, the display mode of the information corresponding to the startup memory information changed before the fluctuation starts becomes a specific display mode (eg, display mode (rainbow)) with a high jackpot expectation. If so, the display mode is not changed in the change. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification, even though it is informed that the jackpot expectation is high. The control load can be reduced.

According to the first and second aspects of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation.

[Game Machine According to Third Invention]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an effect that prompts the player to operate the external input switch is displayed, and when the external input switch is operated, the jackpot expectation that indicates the high probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state It is proposed that a big hit is announced by displaying the degree (see Prior Art Document 2: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-105247).

However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 2, whether or not the jackpot expectation degree is displayed is determined depending on whether or not the external input switch is operated. There was a problem that became monotonous.

A third invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a notice regarding an advantageous state having a higher interest.

The third invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit game state),
Based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means, an identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 53, a second special symbol display section 54) for performing variable display of identification information,
A performance executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for performing a performance,
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the production execution means,
An operation unit (for example, a push operation button 9A) capable of accepting a predetermined operation of the player,
The effect execution means can perform a specific effect (for example, operation-linked effect),
The specific effect is to sequentially shift a plurality of effect stages (for example, "0" to "11"), and when the final effect stage is reached, a predetermined effect (for example, supermarket) is performed. Reach C) is performed,
The plurality of performance stages include a predetermined performance stage and a specific performance stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period),
The effect control means, in the specific effect,
When the current performance stage is the predetermined performance stage, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the next performance stage on condition that the predetermined operation is performed, and according to the determination result. Move to the next stage,
If the current performance stage is the specific performance stage, be sure to perform the predetermined operation after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed). It is a game machine characterized by shifting to the next stage of production.

In the third invention, a plurality of effect stages (for example, "0" to "11") are sequentially moved, and when the final effect stage is reached, a predetermined effect (for example, super reach C) is performed. In a specific effect (for example, operation-linked effect), if the current effect step is a predetermined effect step, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A). Then, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the next performance stage, and if it is a specific performance stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period), after a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, a conditional stage transition). It is configured to always move to the next performance stage on condition that a predetermined operation is performed after the elapse of the period). With such a configuration, it is possible to give a more interesting big hit announcement.

Further, a third aspect of the present invention is characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed in the specific effect stage. It is a game machine.

Further, in the third invention, when the current performance stage is a specific performance stage, when a predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed, If the predetermined operation is performed before the predetermined period elapses after shifting to the next effect stage, it is configured not to shift to the next effect stage. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a state in which the production stage does not shift even when a predetermined operation is performed and a state in which the production stage always shifts when the predetermined operation is performed, in a specific production. Therefore, it is possible to give a feeling of strangeness to the player who was able to smoothly shift the production stage, and it is possible to diversify the production.

The third invention is
The operating means, in the specific performance, when the current performance stage is the specific performance stage, disables the reception of the predetermined operation during the predetermined period. It is a game machine.

Further, in the third aspect of the invention, when the current performance stage is a specific performance stage, a predetermined operation is invalidated during a predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to control the effect so as to be more interlocked with the operation of the player at a specific effect stage, and it is possible to improve the interest in the effect.

The third invention is
In the specific effect, a first specific effect pattern (for example, operation-linked effect success) that may move to the final effect stage and a second specification that does not possibly move to the final effect stage. Production pattern (for example, operation-linked production failure),
In any of the cases where the effect control means performs the specific effect based on the first specific effect pattern or the specific effect based on the second specific effect pattern. Even if there is a specific time (for example, operation-linked effect effective time) after the specific effect starts, the specific effect is terminated,
When terminating the specific effect performed based on the first specific effect pattern, if the final effect stage has not been entered, an advance notice that the predetermined effect is to be performed The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the predetermined effect is performed after performing an effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure→reverse effect).

Further, in the third aspect of the invention, even when a specific effect is performed based on a specific effect pattern (for example, operation-linked effect success) that may shift to the final effect step, the final effect step However, in this case, it is configured to perform a predetermined effect after performing a notice effect (for example, operation linked effect failure→reverse effect) that gives advance notice that a predetermined effect will be performed. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the transition of the production stage, but to give a certain expectation to the big hit when a specific production is performed.

According to the third aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can give a notice about an advantageous state that is more interesting.

[Game Machines According to Fourth and Fifth Inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, it has been proposed that a player can select a music piece to be played in an advantageous state (see prior art document 3: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-125519).

By the way, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 3, there is a problem that the player's selection of music is determined in advance, so that if the player plays the game to some extent, the interest in selecting the music decreases.

On the other hand, it is possible to increase the number of selectable songs each time a certain amount of games, for example, a certain number of games are played, but even in such a case, it is possible to improve the interest. It's hard to say that we can do it enough.

The fourth and fifth inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and by adding value when increasing the number of songs that can be selected by the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a machine.

The fourth invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit game state),
Based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means, an identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 53, a second special symbol display section 54) for performing variable display of identification information,
An operation means (for example, a push operation button 9A, a jog dial 9B) capable of accepting an operation related to a player's effect,
Production display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for performing production display,
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) for outputting music,
And an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the effect display means and the music output means,
The effect display means, in a specific effect state (eg, RUSH mode), one character appears from a plurality of predetermined characters (eg, characters 1 to 12), and the appearance character (eg, battle). Characters and a predetermined character (for example, the main character) compete, and perform a specific effect display (for example, "Kekko Battle Reach" effect) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the competition. Is possible,
In the specific effect display, a first specific effect display pattern (for example, “Kekko Battle Reach”) is informed that the battle result is a victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is given. ) And a second specific effect display pattern (for example, “Kekko Battle Reach Loss”) in which the battle result is a victory of the appearing character and the advantageous state is not given.
The music output means is capable of outputting a plurality of music corresponding to the plurality of characters,
The effect control means,
In the specific effect state, when it is determined by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous state is given, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, from among the plurality of characters A hit character determining means for determining the appearing character (for example, the processing of S447 in the processing in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50),
A hit character history storage means for storing the appearing character determined by the hit character determination means (for example, the processing of S503 in the hit start processing shown in FIG. 54),
When the player performs a music selection operation on the operation means, music increase means for increasing the selectable music based on the appearance character stored by the hit character history storage means (for example, FIG. 54). The process of S504 in the hit start process)
When the advantageous state determination means determines that the advantageous state is not given in the specific effect state, and the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the hit character history storage Loss-time character determining means (for example, the processing of S448 and S449 in the RUSH mode during processing shown in FIG. 50) for determining the appearing character from the plurality of characters excluding the appearing character stored by the means. It is a gaming machine characterized by the fact.

In the fourth aspect of the invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), when it is decided to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), a specific effect display (for example, “Kakekko Battle Reach”). When an effect is performed, the appearing character (for example, an opponent character) in the particular effect display is stored as a winning character, and the music corresponding to the winning character becomes a new acquired music. It is configured to be selectable. Further, in the specific effect state, when the advantageous state is not determined to be given, when the specific effect display is performed, the appearance character stored as the won character is not determined. ing. That is, in the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed and the appearance character stored as the winning character appears, the advantageous state is determined to be given.

Therefore, in the fourth invention, as the number of selectable songs increases, it is possible to provide the added value of changing the jackpot expectation degree when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state. Can be improved.

The fifth invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means, an identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 53, a second special symbol display section 54) for performing variable display of identification information,
An operation means (for example, a push operation button 9A, a jog dial 9B) capable of accepting an operation related to a player's effect,
Production display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for performing production display,
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) for outputting music,
And an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the effect display means and the music output means,
The effect display means, in a specific effect state (eg, RUSH mode), one character appears from a plurality of predetermined characters (eg, characters 1 to 12), and the appearance character (eg, battle). Characters and a predetermined character (for example, the main character) compete, and perform a specific effect display (for example, "Kekko Battle Reach" effect) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the competition. Is possible,
In the specific effect display, a first specific effect display pattern (for example, “Kekko Battle Reach”) is informed that the battle result is a victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is given. ) And a second specific effect display pattern (for example, “Kekko Battle Reach Loss”) in which the battle result is a victory of the appearing character and the advantageous state is not given.
The music output means is capable of outputting a plurality of music corresponding to the plurality of characters,
The effect control means,
In the specific effect state, when performing the specific effect display, one character determination order is selected from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24). Character determination order determining means (for example, the processing of S362 in the pressing operation button operation determination processing shown in FIG. 46);
A character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means when performing the specific performance display in the specific performance state. Usage determining means (for example, the processing of S446 in the processing in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50),
In the specific effect state, when the advantageous state determining unit determines that the advantageous state is given, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order use determining unit When it is determined that the character determination order is to be used, the appearance character is determined from the plurality of characters according to the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means, and the character When the use of the character determination order is not determined by the determination order use determination means, the hit character determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 50, which determines the appearance character from the plurality of characters by lottery. The process of S447 in the process during the RUSH mode),
A hit character history storage means for storing the appearing character determined by the hit character determination means (for example, the processing of S503 in the hit start processing shown in FIG. 54),
When the player performs a music selection operation on the operation means, music increase means for increasing the selectable music based on the appearance character stored by the hit character history storage means (for example, FIG. 54). The process of S504 in the hit start process)
In the case where the advantageous state determination unit determines that the advantageous state is not given in the specific effect state and the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order determination unit The lost character determining means (for example, in FIG. 50) that determines the appearing character from the plurality of characters excluding the appearing character stored by the hit character history storing means in the character determining order determined by The processing of S448 and S449 in the processing in the RUSH mode shown), and a gaming machine.

In the fifth aspect of the invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), when it is decided to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach"). When an effect is performed, the appearing character (for example, an opponent character) in the particular effect display is stored as a winning character, and the music corresponding to the winning character becomes a new acquired music. It is configured to be selectable. Further, in the specific effect state, when the advantageous state is not determined to be given, when the specific effect display is performed, the appearance character stored as the won character is not determined. ing. That is, in the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed and the appearance character stored as the winning character appears, the advantageous state is determined to be given.

Therefore, in the fifth invention, as the number of selectable songs increases, it is possible to give an added value of changing the jackpot expectation degree when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state. Can be improved.

Further, in the fifth invention, the order of determination of the appearing characters in the specific effect state (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) is determined, and when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing characters are displayed in accordance with the order of determination. In some cases, the appearance character is determined by lottery, and in other cases, the appearance character is determined. Further, in the fifth aspect, when it is not decided to give an advantageous state, when a specific effect display is performed, an appearing character not stored as a won character is decided in the order of decision. Is configured to. That is, in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed, the appearance character can be determined to be active or inactive within a range in which there is no discrepancy in the jackpot expectation.

Therefore, in the fifth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to match the jackpot expectation while ensuring the randomness of the appearing characters when a particular effect display is performed in a particular effect state, thereby improving the interest. it can.

According to the fourth and fifth aspects of the invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest by giving an added value when increasing the number of songs that the player can select.

[Game Machines According to Sixth and Seventh Inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a specific reach is generated and transitioned to the advantageous state during the special gaming state (probability variation gaming state) where it is easy to obtain the determination result that the advantageous state is given It is proposed that the story progresses (see Prior Art Document 4: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115444).

However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 4, since the story in the series of productions only proceeds in a predetermined order, the series of productions is monotonous and lacks in fun. ..

The sixth and seventh inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section. ..

The sixth invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit game state),
Based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means, an identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 53, a second special symbol display section 54) for performing variable display of identification information,
Production display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for performing production display,
And an effect control unit (for example, the sub CPU 71) for controlling the effect display unit,
The effect display means,
In a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears among a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearance character (for example, opponent character) and a predetermined character. (E.g., a main character), a specific effect display (for example, "Kekko Battle Reach" effect) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the match,
In the specific effect state, a specific character (for example, character 1) of the plurality of characters appears, the specific character and the predetermined character compete, and the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the battle. It is possible to perform a special effect display (for example, "special character battle reach" effect) that notifies that
The effect control means,
In the specific effect state, when performing the specific effect display, one character determination order is selected from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24). Character determination order determining means (for example, the processing of S362 in the pressing operation button operation determination processing shown in FIG. 46);
A character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means when performing the specific performance display in the specific performance state. Usage determining means (for example, the processing of S446 in the processing in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50),
In the specific effect state, when performing the specific effect display, if the use of the character determination order is determined by the character determination order use determination means, the character determination order determination means determines. If the appearance character is determined from the plurality of characters according to the determined character determination order, and the use of the character determination order is not determined by the character determination order use determining means, it is determined by lottery. Character determining means for determining the appearing character from a plurality of characters (for example, the processing of S447 in the processing in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50),
In the plurality of character determination orders, the specific character has a relatively lower rank determined as the appearance character by the character determination means.

In the sixth invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) that notifies whether or not an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is given. ) And a special effect display (for example, “special character battle reach” effect) that notifies that the advantageous state is given, is configured. Further, in the sixth invention, when the determination order (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) of the appearing characters (for example, the fighting characters) appearing in the specific effect display is determined and the specific effect display is performed, It is configured to further determine whether or not to determine the appearing character in this order of determination. Then, in the sixth invention, when it is decided to decide the appearing character in the decision order when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing character is decided in the decision order, and the decision is made. When it is not decided to decide the appearing character in order, the appearing character is decided by lottery. Further, in the sixth invention, when a specific character (for example, character 1) appearing in the special effect display is determined to appear in the order of determination in the specific effect display, the order of determination is determined. Is configured to be relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a particular effect state, not only is the assignment of the advantageous state confirmed, but also a character that normally does not appear appears.

Therefore, in the sixth aspect, it is possible to improve the interest regarding a series of effects (for example, battle effects) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

The seventh invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means, an identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 53, a second special symbol display section 54) for performing variable display of identification information,
Production display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for performing production display,
And an effect control unit (for example, the sub CPU 71) for controlling the effect display unit,
The effect display means,
In a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears among a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearance character (for example, opponent character) and a predetermined character. (E.g., a main character), a specific effect display (for example, "Kekko Battle Reach" effect) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the match,
In the specific effect state, a specific character (for example, character 1) of the plurality of characters appears, the specific character and the predetermined character compete, and the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the battle. It is possible to perform a special effect display (for example, "special character battle reach" effect) that notifies that
In the specific effect display, a first specific effect display pattern (for example, “Kekko Battle Reach”) is informed that the battle result is a victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is given. ) And a second specific effect display pattern (for example, “Kekko Battle Reach Loss”) in which the battle result is a victory of the appearing character and the advantageous state is not given.
The effect control means,
In the specific effect state, when performing the specific effect display, one character determination order is selected from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24). Character determination order determining means (for example, the processing of S362 in the pressing operation button operation determination processing shown in FIG. 46);
A character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means when performing the specific performance display in the specific performance state. Usage determining means (for example, the processing of S446 in the processing in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50),
In the specific effect state, when the advantageous state determining unit determines that the advantageous state is given, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order use determining unit When it is determined that the character determination order is to be used, the appearance character is determined from the plurality of characters according to the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means, and the character When the use of the character determination order is not determined by the determination order use determination means, the hit character determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 50, which determines the appearance character from the plurality of characters by lottery. The process of S447 in the process during the RUSH mode),
A hit character history storage means for storing the appearing character determined by the hit character determination means (for example, the processing of S503 in the hit start processing shown in FIG. 54),
In the case where the advantageous state determination unit determines that the advantageous state is not given in the specific effect state and the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order determination unit The lost character determining means (for example, in FIG. 50) that determines the appearing character from the plurality of characters excluding the appearing character stored by the hit character history storing means in the order of character determination determined by The processing of S448 and S449 in the processing in the RUSH mode shown),
In the plurality of character determination orders, the specific character has a relatively low rank as the appearance character determined by the character determination means,
The hit character history storage means is a gaming machine characterized by storing the specific character as the appearing character when the special effect display is performed in the specific effect state.

In the seventh invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) that notifies whether or not an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is given. ) And a special effect display (for example, “special character battle reach” effect) that notifies that the advantageous state is given, is configured. Further, in the seventh invention, when the determination order (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) of the appearing character (for example, the battle character) that appears in the specific effect display is determined, and the specific effect display is performed, It is configured to further determine whether or not to determine the appearing character in this order of determination. Then, in the seventh aspect, when it is determined that the appearance character is determined in the determination order when the specific effect display is performed, the appearance character is determined in the determination order, and the determination is performed. When it is not decided to decide the appearing character in order, the appearing character is decided by lottery. Further, in the seventh invention, when a specific character (for example, character 1) appearing in the special effect display is determined to appear in the order of determination in the specific effect display, the order of determination is determined. Is configured to be relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a particular effect state, not only is the assignment of the advantageous state confirmed, but also a character that normally does not appear appears.

Therefore, in the seventh invention, it is possible to improve the interest regarding a series of effects (for example, battle effects) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

Further, in the seventh invention, when it is determined that the advantageous state is given in the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing character in the specific effect display has won. When the specific effect display is performed when the advantageous state is not determined to be stored as the character, the appearing character stored as the won character is not determined. That is, in the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed and the appearance character stored as the winning character appears, the advantageous state is determined to be given. Further, in the seventh invention, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, a specific character is also stored as a winning character.

Therefore, in the seventh invention, as the series of effects executed in the predetermined game section progress, the jackpot expectation degree in the specific effect display can be changed, and the interest can be improved.

The seventh invention is
An operation unit (for example, a push operation button 9A, a jog dial 9B) capable of accepting an operation related to a player's effect,
When the player performs a takeover selection operation to the operation means when the player shifts to the specific effect state, the appearance stored by the hit character history storage means in the last specific effect state. The game machine according to the above, wherein the characters are inherited and the character determination order determined by the character determination order determining means is also inherited.

Further, in the seventh invention, when the transition to the specific effect state, the winning character history in the previous specific effect state can be inherited, and when the winning character history is inherited, it is determined. The determined order of the appearing characters is also inherited. With such a configuration, depending on the presence or absence of the takeover selection operation, a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section can be started from a state desired by the player, and a jackpot expectation degree in a specific effect display can be obtained. Can be changed, and interest can be improved.

According to the sixth and seventh inventions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section.

[Game Machines According to Eighth and Ninth Inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the number of holdings is held based on the number of held starting memory information (holding number) and information indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an advantageous state (big hit lottery result) It has been proposed that the so-called "pre-reading effect" as a big hit announcement is performed by changing the display mode of the hold ball effect design indicating "(Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-70864).

However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, since the change pattern of the display mode of the hold ball effect design is only determined from a plurality of predetermined change patterns, the effect contents of the big hit announcement There was a problem that became monotonous.

Further, in such a gaming machine, there is a limit to the information that can be notified by a change in the display mode of the hold ball effect design, and a gaming machine that can notify more diverse information in a new mode is desired. Was there.

The eighth and ninth inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and can provide a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation, and can also notify more diverse information in a novel manner. The purpose is to provide a machine.

The eighth invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which a game medium can roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start memory information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area,
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means (whether to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player) For example, with the main CPU 61),
Based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display) Part 53, the second special symbol display part 54),
In accordance with the variable display of the identification information, a symbol variable display means (for example, a symbol variable display area 700) for performing variable display of symbols,
First information display means (for example, first reserved sphere display area 701, second reserved sphere) for displaying first information (for example, reserved sphere) corresponding to the started memorized information stored in the started memorized information storing means. A display area 702, a variation holding sphere display area 703),
A second information display unit (for example, an item display area 800) capable of displaying a plurality of second information (for example, an item) different from the first information;
First display mode determining means for determining a display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determining means (for example, a hold display shown in FIG. 53. Mode change effect processing),
Second display mode determination means (for example, RUSH shown in FIG. 51) that sequentially determines the display mode of the second information displayed by the second information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. Item production processing during mode),
The specific game state includes a plurality of specific game states in which the number of game media that can be obtained (for example, the actual number of rounds) is different,
The first information display means determines the display manner of the first information displayed on the first information display means by the first display manner determination means based on whether or not to shift to the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the big hit expectation degree indicating whether to shift to the specific game state,
The second information display means is displayed on the second information display means by the second display mode determination means based on the number of game media that can be acquired when the game state shifts to the specific game state. By determining the display mode of the information of No. 2, it is possible to notify the expected number of game media to be acquired, which indicates the number of game media that can be acquired when shifting to the specific game state. It is a gaming machine.

The eighth invention is
The second display mode determination means continuously displays the second information of the same display mode on the second information display means as the number of expected game media to be acquired when shifting to the specific game state increases. The above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the second information is determined so that the number of items to be stored increases.

In the eighth invention, the first information (for example, the hold) is displayed in the first information display means (for example, the first hold sphere display area 701, the second hold sphere display area 702, the variable hold sphere display area 703). The expected jackpot degree is notified by the display mode of the sphere), and the expected expected game medium number is acquired by the display mode of the second information (for example, item) displayed by the second information display means (for example, item display area 800). It is configured to be able to notify. That is, by summing up these pieces of information, it is possible to infer which of the specific game states (for example, the big hit game state) is highly expected. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation, and to notify more diverse information in a novel manner.

The eighth invention is
The second information display means includes a plurality of second information display areas (for example, a first item display area 801 to a fourth item display area 804) that display each of the plurality of second information, and the plurality of second information display areas. A frame display area other than the second information display area (for example, an item area frame display area),
When the second display mode determining means determines that the second information of the same display mode is continuously displayed on the second information display means by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, Frame display mode determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the frame display area is a special mode based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determining means (for example, item production process in RUSH mode shown in FIG. 51). The gaming machine described above, characterized by comprising:

Further, in the eighth invention, when a predetermined condition (for example, three items or more) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display unit, the second information display unit itself is further The display content (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may change, and when it changes, the jackpot expectation degree and/or the expected acquisition game medium number are changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the content of the notification on the second information display means and enhance the interest of the game.

The ninth invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which a game medium can roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start memory information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area,
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means (whether to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player) For example, with the main CPU 61),
Based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display) Part 53, the second special symbol display part 54),
In accordance with the variable display of the identification information, a symbol variable display means (for example, a symbol variable display area 700) for performing variable display of symbols,
First information display means (for example, first reserved sphere display area 701, second reserved sphere) for displaying first information (for example, reserved sphere) corresponding to the started memorized information stored in the started memorized information storing means. A display area 702, a variation holding sphere display area 703),
A second information display unit (for example, an item display area 800) capable of displaying a plurality of second information (for example, an item) different from the first information;
First display mode determining means for determining a display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determining means (for example, a hold display shown in FIG. 53. Mode change effect processing),
Second display mode determination means (for example, RUSH shown in FIG. 51) that sequentially determines the display mode of the second information displayed by the second information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. Item production processing during mode),
The specific game state includes a plurality of specific game states in which the number of game media that can be obtained (for example, the actual number of rounds) is different,
The first information display means determines the display manner of the first information displayed on the first information display means by the first display manner determination means based on whether or not to shift to the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the big hit expectation degree indicating whether to shift to the specific game state,
The second information display means is displayed on the second information display means by the second display mode determination means based on the number of game media that can be acquired when the game state shifts to the specific game state. By determining the display mode of the information of No. 2, it is possible to inform the expected number of game media to be acquired, which indicates the number of game media that can be acquired when shifting to the specific game state,
The second display mode determination means continuously displays the second information of the same display mode on the second information display means as the number of expected game media to be acquired when shifting to the specific game state increases. The display mode of the second information is determined so as to increase the number of images to be displayed, but the first information display unit displays the first information in a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) with a high expectation of the big hit. When the second information is displayed, the second information of the second information is not displayed continuously on the second information display means in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. It is a game machine characterized by determining a display mode.

In the ninth aspect of the invention, the first information (for example, the hold) The expected jackpot degree is notified by the display mode of the sphere), and the expected expected game medium number is acquired by the display mode of the second information (for example, item) displayed by the second information display means (for example, item display area 800). It is configured to be able to notify. That is, by summing up these pieces of information, it is possible to infer which of the specific game states (for example, the big hit game state) is highly expected. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation, and to notify more diverse information in a novel manner.

Further, in the ninth invention, when the display mode of the first information is a specific display mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, a display mode (rainbow)), the same display mode as the second information display means is displayed. The second information is configured not to be continuously displayed for a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. With such a configuration, for example, it is notified that the expected number of game media to be acquired is low, even though it is informed that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. You can Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification even though it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high.

The ninth invention is
The second information display means includes a plurality of second information display areas (for example, a first item display area 801 to a fourth item display area 804) that display each of the plurality of second information, and the plurality of second information display areas. A frame display area other than the second information display area (for example, an item area frame display area),
When the second display mode determining means determines that the second information of the same display mode is continuously displayed on the second information display means by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, Frame display mode determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the frame display area is a special mode based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determining means (for example, item production process in RUSH mode shown in FIG. 51). The gaming machine described above, characterized by comprising:

Further, in the ninth invention, when a predetermined condition (for example, three items or more) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display unit, the second information display unit itself is further The display content (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may change, and when it changes, the jackpot expectation degree and/or the expected acquisition game medium number are changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the content of the notification on the second information display means and enhance the interest of the game.

According to the eighth and ninth aspects of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a big hit announcement that further enhances the player's expectation and notifying more diverse information in a novel manner.

[Game Machine According to Tenth Invention]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot gaming state is transitioned to, if there is something that is determined to be shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the stored starting memory information, during the jackpot gaming state It has been proposed that the number of rounds scheduled to be executed in addition to the number of rounds scheduled to be executed during the next big hit game state to be displayed to notify the so-called "holding condominium" (prior art) Reference 5: See JP-A-2006-130192).

However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 5, for example, when it is determined that the big hit game state in which the number of rounds to be executed is small is suspended and the notification as described above is given, the game is played instead. There is a problem that the interest may be deteriorated, and the above notification may not be appropriately performed depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

A tenth aspect of the present invention is made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and provides a gaming machine that can appropriately notify that a big hit game state is held in a continuous manner so as to improve the interest. With the goal.

The tenth invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which a game medium can roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
It has a specific area (for example, specific area 38A) that is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium is easily received and a second mode in which the game medium is hard to be received and through which the game medium can pass. A variable winning device (for example, a special winning opening 37),
Start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area,
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means (whether to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player) For example, with the main CPU 61),
Based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display) Part 53, the second special symbol display part 54),
Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display means has become a specific display mode,
On the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, after the specific game state is finished, the determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state is relatively performed. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling to a special game state (for example, probability variation game state) that is easily obtained,
A performance executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for performing a performance,
And an effect control unit (for example, the sub CPU 71) that controls the effect execution unit,
The specific game state control means can perform control such that passage of the game medium to the specific region is relatively easy at least during a specific period during the specific game state (for example, a specific second round game). And
When the game medium passes through the specific area in the specific game state and satisfies the transition condition to the special game state in the specific game state, the effect execution means indicates a specific effect (for example, V prize winning effect). ) Is possible,
In the specific game state, the effect control means, when the game medium passes through the specific area and satisfies the transition condition to the special game state, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means. When the information includes the starting memory information that is determined to be shifted to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means, a first effect as the specific effect (for example, special V winning time effect) In the case where the starting memory information that is determined to cause the effect execution means to execute (V-winning effect based on data) and to be moved to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means is not included, the specific Is a game machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a second effect different from the first effect (for example, a V winning time effect based on normal V winning time effect data).

In the tenth invention, in a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state), a game medium passes (V prize) through a specific region (for example, a specific region 38A), to a special game state (for example, probability variation game state). When the transition condition is satisfied, a specific effect (for example, a V-winning effect) is performed, but in this case, the starting memory information that is held is determined to be transferred to the specific game state. If there is, it is configured such that a different effect from that in the case where there is no starting memory information for determining the transition to the specific game state is performed. That is, when the game state after the V prize is won and the specific game state is finished is determined, the fact that the game is held in suspension (or the possibility thereof) is notified together with that effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the specific game state is in a suspended state so as to improve the interest.

According to the tenth aspect of the invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying that the big hit game state is held in a suspended state so as to improve the interest.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. The same or similar components as those of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 66 is provided with only one special winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 66, a special winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. Inside the special winning opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the game ball downward is formed. A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are provided at the lower end of the ball passage 37B so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right. A special winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position where the special winning opening 37 enters the ball passage. The specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. The non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39' that can be displaced left and right is provided inside the spherical passage 37B near the specific region 38A and the non-specific region 38B. The position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 66 is the position after displacement, and the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 66 is the initial position.

The displacement member 39' switches the specific area 38A between the open state and the closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 66, when the displacement member 39′ is in the fixed position on the left side farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened, and V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is performed. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39' forms a gap with the right side wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can sufficiently pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and can pass through the specific area 38A. is there. Further, when the displacement member 39' is in the left fixed position, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the displacement member 39' and the left side wall of the ball passage 37B. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass through the non-specific region 38B through between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'.

In addition, when the specific area is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. When the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member that allows the game ball to pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member that prevents the game ball from passing through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be placed at one of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is placed at the second position, the game ball will pass through the specific area without fail if the player wins the special winning opening. Therefore, the game is more advantageous to the player than that according to the above-described embodiment. Modes can be provided.

On the other hand, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 66, when the displacement member 39′ is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A. The V winning of is made impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39' forms a gap with the left side wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and always passes through the non-specific area 38B. Becomes

Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39', after the jackpot gaming state in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is successful in the jackpot gaming state is completed, it is possible to shift to the probability variation gaming state or the like. That is, according to the special winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 66, even if only one special winning opening (variable winning device) is provided, it is relatively difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A. Since it is possible to execute a one-round game and a specific second-round game in which it is relatively easy to pass a game ball to the specific area 38A, two large winning holes (variable winning a prize device) on the game board. Even if it is difficult to secure a space to install), it is easy to shift to the special gaming state according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific gaming state, or It becomes possible to provide a game machine having a game property of making it difficult.

FIG. 67 is a view showing a special winning opening opening/closing pattern (modification) of the gaming machine according to the other embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the special winning opening opening/closing pattern of FIG. 67. The special winning opening opening/closing pattern and the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 66.

As shown in FIG. 67, the modified example of the special winning opening opening/closing pattern is basically the same as the special winning opening opening/closing pattern shown in FIG. 11, and is applied to one special winning opening provided with a specific region. It is a possible big winning opening and closing pattern. In such a special winning opening opening/closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 68, the displacement member 39′ for opening/closing the specific area 38A is in an operating state only in the 4th R as an example, and is in a position shown by a solid line in FIG. 66. Become. On the other hand, in the 1st to 3rd eyes and the 5th to 12th eyes, the displacement member 39' is in the non-actuated state, and is in the state shown by the phantom line in FIG. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a special winning opening opening/closing pattern is applied to one big winning opening, it is possible to achieve the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process is provided with only one big winning opening, but no specific area is provided, and the main CPU determines whether or not the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state according to the type of big hit symbol. Applied to.

As shown in FIG. 69, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory. In this process, the main CPU, if it is determined that there is no starting memory of the special symbol game, that is, if no data is stored in the special symbol starting storage area (0) to the special symbol starting storage area (4), the data is This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is a start-up memory, it shifts the processing to S1001.

In S1001, the main CPU executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU determines whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. The big hit determination table for high probability with a large number of big hit determination values or the low probability for a small number of big hit determination values. Refer to the jackpot determination table of. Further, the main CPU refers to the random number value for determining a hit in the special symbol starting storage area, which is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and the selected big hit determination table. Then, when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match, the main CPU determines that it is a big hit. That is, the main CPU determines whether or not to make a big hit game state advantageous to the player. That is, as a result of the special symbol game, either a big hit or a loss is determined. When this process ends, the process moves to S1002.

In S1002, the main CPU determines whether the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S1003. On the other hand, if the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, if it is determined that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S1000.

In S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot gaming state. That is, the main CPU issues a special winning opening open display command, sets large winning opening open data, and the like. When this process ends, the process moves to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the process proceeds to S1006. When it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the process is moved to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU controls the non-probability variation gaming state after the end of the big-hit gaming state that started the control in S1003. In other words, in the big hit game state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation big hit, it will shift to the non-probability variation game state after that. When shifting to such a non-probability variation game state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

In S1006, the main CPU controls the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot gaming state started in S1003. That is, in the big hit game state based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, it will be sure to shift to the probability variation game state after the end. When shifting to such a probability variation gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

In the pachinko gaming machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, by providing the same effect mode as that of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the round in which the winning of the special winning opening is easy.

Although the present invention has been described above using the present embodiment and other embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these. That is, the specific configuration of each means included in the present invention is not limited to the examples adopted in the above-described present embodiment and other embodiments, and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is.

For example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71 shown in the present embodiment and the other embodiments may be appropriately managed in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention. Can be changed. For example, various counters and various timers managed by “addition” may be managed by “subtraction”. In this case, the judgment of "is greater than or equal to" is read as a judgment of whether it is "less than or equal to", and the judgment of whether "exceeds" is "less than" Can be read as judgment. Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by “subtraction” may be managed by “addition”. In this case, the determination of "less than or equal to" is replaced with the determination of "more than or equal to", and the determination of "less than or equal to" determines whether or not "more than". Can be read as judgment.

Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 61 shown in the present embodiment and other embodiments are managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 without departing from the gist of the invention. The various counters and various timers managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 61 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Further, for example, various game states managed by the control of the main CPU 61 shown in the present embodiment and other embodiments are managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Alternatively, the various effect modes managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 61 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Note that all the inventions described in the present embodiment and other embodiments are applied to pachi-slot machines, slot machines, game machines, ball game machines, and all other game machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. can do.

In particular, the pachi-slot machine has a main control circuit and a sub control circuit, and enables detection of a start operation (for example, an operation on a start lever) based on the insertion of a game medium (for example, a medal). , An advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the start operation being performed (for example, a big bonus (BB), a middle bonus (MB), a regular bonus (RB), a replay time (RT), an assist time (AT ), whether to give an assist replay time (ART), or whether to give a predetermined profit (for example, payout of medals, operation of re-play) (the result of this determination is determined as “internal winning combination”). Based on the fact that the rotation of a plurality of reels to which identification information (for example, a plurality of symbols and symbols) has been attached is started and a stop operation (for example, an operation to a stop button) is performed. Rotation control of multiple reels is stopped so that the combination of symbols according to the internal winning combination is stopped, and depending on the combination of stopped symbols, it shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player or a predetermined profit is given. Therefore, it is easy to apply the invention described in the present embodiment and other embodiments.

That is, the inventions described in the present embodiment and other embodiments include a symbol display means (for example, a plurality of reels) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a start operation means (for example, a start operation) that performs a start operation. Lever), an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation, and a symbol display means based on the starting operation being performed. Symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, main control circuit) for starting variable display of symbols, stop operation means (for example, stop button) for performing stop operation, and that the stop operation has been performed and the determined internal winning A symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, a main control circuit) for stopping the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means based on the winning combination, and the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display stop means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, A profit giving means (for example, a main control circuit) that gives a profit according to a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, a performance display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) that performs a performance display, and the performance display means. It is easy to apply to a pachi-slot machine which is a gaming machine provided with a production control means (for example, a sub control circuit or a main control circuit) for controlling the.

1 game board 1p game area 4 liquid crystal display device 32 first start opening 33 second start opening 36 first big winning opening 36A first big winning opening shutter 37 second big winning opening 37 second big winning opening shutter 38A specific area 38B Non-specific area 39, 39' Displacement member 61 Main CPU
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 Dispensing device

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll,
A starting area provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device, which is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is hard to be received, and which has a specific area through which the game medium can pass,
Starting memory information storage means capable of storing a plurality of starting memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the starting area,
Every time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player,
Identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means,
Specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display means has become a specific display mode,
As a gaming state in which the identification information can be variably displayed or stopped, a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is relatively easier to obtain than the normal gaming state, Fluctuating game state control means capable of controlling to any game state including,
Special game state control means for controlling to the special game state after the specific game state ends, provided that the game medium has passed through the specific region in the specific game state,
Production execution means for performing production,
Production control means for controlling the production execution means,
And a production mode control means for controlling a production mode for performing the production,
The specific game state control means is capable of performing control such that passage of the game medium to the specific region is relatively easy at least during a specific period during the specific game state,
The effect mode control means controls to any of the effect modes including a normal mode that can be set in the normal game state and a special mode that can be set in the normal game state or the special game state. Is possible,
The effect execution means,
In the specific game state, when the game medium passes through the specific area and the transition condition to the special game state is satisfied, it is possible to perform a specific effect to that effect,
In the specific game state, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means includes the start storage information determined to be transferred to the specific game state by the specific game state transfer determination means. It is possible to perform suggestive production that suggests
The effect control means,
In the specific game state, when the game medium passes through the specific area and satisfies the transition condition to the special game state, the specific game is stored in the startup storage information stored in the startup storage information storage means. When the start memory information that is determined to be shifted to the specific game state by the state transition determination means is included, the first effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the specific game state transition determination means is used to specify When the starting memory information determined to be shifted to the game state is not included, the effect executing means is caused to execute a second effect different from the first effect,
The second effect is configured to include the specific effect,
The first effect is configured to include the specific effect and further include the suggestive effect,
The first effect and the second effect can be executed in the specific game state that has moved when the special mode has been set, while the specific effect that has transitioned when the normal mode has been set A gaming machine characterized by an effect that is not executed in a gaming state.

Images